1756-UM001D-EN-P, ControlLogix System User Manual


Add to my manuals
462 Pages

advertisement

1756-UM001D-EN-P, ControlLogix System User Manual | Manualzz

ControlLogix™

System

1756-L1, -L1Mx, -L55Mxx, -L63

File Name: AB_ControlLogix_1756_L1_L1Mx_L5Mxx_L63_user_D1101

User Manual

Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of these products must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards. In no event will Allen-Bradley be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damage resulting from the use or application of these products.

Any illustrations, charts, sample programs, and layout examples shown in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication.

Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the

Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control

(available from your local Allen-Bradley office), describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication.

Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, is prohibited.

Throughout this publication, notes may be used to make you aware of safety considerations. The following annotations and their accompanying statements help you to identify a potential hazard, avoid a potential hazard, and recognize the consequences of a potential hazard:

WARNING

!

Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION

!

Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

IMPORTANT

Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Introduction

Updated Information

Summary of Changes

This release of this document contains new and updated information.

To find new and updated information, look for change bars, as shown next to this paragraph.

The document contains the following changes:

This new or updated information: Starts on page:

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-1

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

9-1

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet

Network 14-1

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Program Motion Control

Estimate Battery Life

Estimate Execution Time

Estimate Memory Use

Reconfigure an I/O module

20-1

24-1

25-1

B-1

C-1

E-1

1 Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Summary of Changes 2

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Preface

Purpose of this Manual This manual guides the development of projects for ControlLogix controllers. It provides step-by-step procedures on how to establish communications:

• over the following networks

EtherNet/IP

ControlNet

remote I/O

DH+

DH-485

serial

• with the following devices

controllers

I/O

workstations

PanelView

terminals

This manual works together with the Logix5000 Controllers Common

Procedures, publication 1756-PM001, which covers the following tasks:

Manage project files

Organize your logic

Organize tags

Program routines

Test a project

Handle faults

Who Should Use this

Manual

This manual is intended for those individuals who program applications that use ControlLogix controllers, such as:

• software engineers

• control engineers

• application engineers

• instrumentation technicians

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Preface 2

When to Use this Manual Use this manual:

• when you are ready to integrate your application with the I/0 devices, controllers, and networks in your system.

after you perform these actions:

develop the basic code for your application

perform isolated tests of your application

How to Use this Manual

Text that is:

Italic courier

This manual is divided into the basic tasks that you perform while programming a ControlLogix controller.

Each chapter covers a task.

The tasks are organized in the sequence that you will typically perform them.

As you use this manual, you will see some terms that are formatted differently from the rest of the text:

Identifies: the actual name of an item that you see on your screen or in an example information that you must supply based on your application (a variable)

For example:

Right-click

Right-click

User-Defined … name_of_program …

Means:

Right-click on the item that is named

User-Defined.

You must identify the specific program in your application. Typically, it is a name or variable that you have defined.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

RSLogix 5000 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

RSLinx Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

BOOTP Server Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Configure a Module Using RSLogix 5000 Software . . . . . . . 1-7

Connect the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Connect to the Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Configure the Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Check the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Configure a Module Using RSLinx Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Connect the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Configure the Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Check the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Configure a Module Using BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Install BOOTPServer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Connect the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Enter the Default Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Configure the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Disable BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Save the Relation List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Renew the IP Address of a 1794-AENx Module. . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Install BOOTPServer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Set Up the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Enter the New Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Send the Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Disable BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Save the Relation List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Test the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Connect Directly to a Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Connect a Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Configure a Serial Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Download and Go Online over an

EtherNet/IP Network

Chapter 2

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Configure an Ethernet Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Select a Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents ii

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

Chapter 3

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Add the Remote 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Add I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Create Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an

EtherNet/IP Network

Chapter 4

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Before You Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Add the local 1756-ENBx or -ENET module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Add the Remote 1794-AENx Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Add I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Address I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Communicate with Another

Controller over an EtherNet/IP

Network

Chapter 5

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Select a Communication Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Produce a Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Add the Remote 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Add the Other Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Consume a Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Does Another Controller Require the Data? . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Enter a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Stagger the Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Access ControlLogix Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents iii

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP

Network

Chapter 6

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Add the PanelView Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Organize Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Configure the PanelView Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Create PanelView Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Communicate with an RSView

Project over an EtherNet/IP

Network

Chapter 7

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Configure an Ethernet Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Select a Communication Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Create a Polled Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Create a Polled Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Import Logix5000 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Create an .L5K File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Use the Utility to Create a .CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Import the .CSV File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Create a Polled Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Create a Unsolicited Topic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Add the 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Enter a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Create an Unsolicited Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Create an Unsolicited Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Validate an RSView32 Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a

ControlNet™ Network

Chapter 8

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Add the Local 1756-CNB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Add the Remote 1756-CNB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Add I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Create Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Schedule the ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents iv

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a

ControlNet

Network

Chapter 9

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Add the Local 1756-CNB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Add the 1771-ACN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module . . 9-7

Read Data From a Block Transfer Module . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer

Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Configure the Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules

9-12

Create a User-Defined Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Create the Array for the Input Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Send a Block Transfer Read Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Convert the INTs to DINTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Step to the Next BT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules . . . . . . . 9-20

Address I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Schedule the ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Stagger the Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a

ControlNet

Network

Chapter 10

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Add the local 1756-CNB module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Add the Remote 1794-ACN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Add I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Create Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Schedule the ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Communicate with Another

Controller over a ControlNet

Network

Chapter 11

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Step 1: Add the 1756-CNB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Step 2: Add the Remote 1756-CNB Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Step 3: Add the 1788-CNC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Step 4: Add the Other Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Step 5: Enter a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Step 6: Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Step 7: Stagger the Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

Step 8: Access ControlLogix Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents v

Route PLC-5

®

Messages Between

ControlNet

Networks

Chapter 12

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Route a ControlNet Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

Chapter 13

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Add the Local 1756-CNB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Add the PanelView Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Organize Your Scheduled Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Organize Your Unscheduled Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Configure the PanelView Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Create PanelView Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Schedule the ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Communicate with an RSView

Project over a ControlNet

Network

Monitor Connections

Chapter 14

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Configure a ControlNet Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Select a Communication Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Create a Polled Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Create a Polled Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Import Logix5000 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

Create an .L5K File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Use the Utility to Create a .CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Import the .CSV File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10

Create a Polled Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

Create a Unsolicited Topic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14

Add the 1756-CNB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

Enter a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20

Create an Unsolicited Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22

Create an Unsolicited Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

Validate an RSView32 Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24

Chapter 15

When To Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Monitor a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents vi

Communicate with a DeviceNet

Device

Chapter 16

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Step 1: Add the 1756-DNB Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Step 2: Create Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

Step 3: Set the Scanner to Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Communicate with Another

Controller Over a DH+

Network

Chapter 17

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

Configure Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3

Configure a 1756-DHRIO Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8

Add a 1756-DHRIO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11

Enter a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14

Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16

Stagger the Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20

Access ControlLogix Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20

Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network

Chapter 18

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Configure Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Configure a PLC-5 or SLC 500 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6

Communicate with Another

Controller over a DH-485 Network

Chapter 19

When to Use this Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

Step 1: Connect the Controller to an AIC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3

Step 2: Configure the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4

Step 3: Enter a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6

Step 4: Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

Step 5: Check the LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10

Step 6: Stagger the Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents vii

Communicate Over a Remote I/O

Network

Chapter 20

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

Add a 1756-DHRIO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3

Add a Remote I/O Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6

Add a Block Transfer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9

Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module . 20-10

Read Data From a Block Transfer Module . . . . . . . . . . 20-11

Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer

Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13

Configure the Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14

Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer Modules

20-15

Create a User-Defined Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17

Create the Data Array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18

Send the Message to a BT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-19

Enter the Message Properties for Each Module . . . . . . 20-21

Convert the INTs to DINTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22

Step to the Next BT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-23

Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules . . . . . . 20-24

Address I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-26

Validate Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28

Stagger the Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30

Download and Go Online over a

Serial Cable

Chapter 21

When to Use this Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Step 1: Connect a Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

Step 2: Configure a Serial Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

Step 3: Select a Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4

Configure DF1 Master and Slave

Communications

Chapter 22

When to Use this Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

Step 1: Connect and Configure the Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

Step 2: Select a Polling Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3

Step 3: Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling . . .

22-3

Step 4: Configure the Master Controller for Message-Based

Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8

Step 5: Configure a Slave Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10

Step 6: Enter a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12

Step 7: Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14

Step 8: Stagger the Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-17

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents viii

Configure Dial-Up

Communications

Program Motion Control

Maintain the 1756-BA1 Battery

Chapter 23

When to Use this Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Step 1: Connect and Configure the Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

Step 2: Configure the Serial Port of the Controller. . . . . . . . 23-3

Step 3: Dial the Other Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

Step 4: Send the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6

Step 5: Configure the Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8

Step 6: Hang-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11

Step 7: Stagger the Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12

Chapter 24

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2

Select a CST Master Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2

Define the Controller as the CST Master . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3

Define a 1756-SYNCH Module as the CST Master . . . . . 24-3

Add the Motion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4

1756-M08SE - Add the SERCOS Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7

Create a Motion Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9

Assign the Properties of the Motion Group. . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10

Configure the Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12

Display the Properties for the Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12

Select an Axis Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12

Assign Units for Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13

Assign a Conversion Constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13

1756-M02AE - Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive . .

24-14

1756-M08SE - Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier . .

24-15

1756-M08SE - Select the Motor and Feedback . . . . . . . 24-16

Run Hookup Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-17

Download Your Project and Go Online . . . . . . . . . . . 24-17

Display the Properties for the Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-18

Complete the Hookup Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-18

Develop Logic for Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-19

Handle Motion Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20

Chapter 25

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

How to Use This Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Estimate Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Store Replacement Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4

Replace a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents ix

Map a PLC/SLC Address

Estimate Execution Time

Appendix A

When To Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Map an Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B

When to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Estimate Execution Time of a Ladder Instruction . . . . . . . . B-1

Estimate Execution Time of a Function Block Routine . . . B-23

Estimate Execution Time of a Motion Action . . . . . . . . . . B-28

Estimate Memory Use

Appendix C

Using This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Data Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Sign-Extension Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Zero-Fill Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Ladder Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Function Block Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Array Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Appendix D

Determine When Data Is Updated

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Appendix E

Reconfigure an I/O module

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table of Contents x

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

1

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure to configure any of the following modules:

1756-ENBx or -ENET module

1794-AENx module switch 42872

You can configure a module either:

• before you install the module

Configure the module in a temporary location, such as a chassis that is on a test bench.

After you configure the module, install it in your system.

• after you install the module in your system

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-2 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Before You Begin The configuration of an EtherNet/IP module includes:

IP address (required)

• subnet mask (recommended)

• gateway address (optional)

• domain name (optional)

DNS server addresses (optional)

You use software to configure an EtherNet/IP module. (The modules

do not have hardware switches to assign an address.) To configure a module, use one of these software:

RSLogix 5000 Software

RSLinx Software

BOOTP Server Software

To determine which software lets you configure your module, use the following table:

To configure this module: Use one of these software:

1756-ENBx

1756-ENET

1794-AENx

RSLogix 5000

✔

✔

RSLinx

✔

✔

BOOTP server

✔

✔

✔

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-3

RSLogix 5000 Software

RSLogix 5000 software lets you configure a 1756-ENBx or -ENET module via another module that is in the chassis.

controller another communication module module to configure

RSLogix 5000 software

ControlLogix chassis

P/S L

5

5 x x

E

N

B

P/S D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B

E

N

B

E

N

B

ControlLogix chassis network

1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable

Use RSLogix 5000 software to assign:

IP address (required)

• subnet mask (recommended)

• gateway address (optional)

• domain name (optional)

DNS server addresses (optional)

When you configure a module with RSLogix 5000 software, you enter an IP address or host name in two locations:

On this tab:

General (first screen of the

Module Properties wizard)

Port Configuration

You:

Identify the module on the EtherNet/IP network with which you want to connect

Assign configuration information to the module, such as its

IP address. This information is stored in the module and identifies the module on the EtherNet/IP network.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-4 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

RSLinx Software

RSLinx software lets you configure a 1756-ENBx or -ENET module via another module in the chassis.

controller another communication module module to configure

RSLinx software

ControlLogix chassis

P/S L

5

5 x x

E

N

B

P/S

1756-CP3 or 1747-CP3 serial cable

Use RSLinx software to assign:

IP address (required)

• subnet mask (recommended)

• gateway address (optional)

• domain name (optional)

DNS server addresses (optional)

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B

E

N

B

E

N

B

ControlLogix chassis network

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-5

BOOTP Server Software

To configure a module over an EtherNet/IP network, use any of the following BOOTP server software:

BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation

• any BOOTP server software that is commercially available

BOOTP server software

P/S E

N

B

ControlLogix chassis switch

EtherNet/IP network

P/S A

E

N

Flex I/O

The default setting for a Rockwell Automation EtherNet/IP module is to use BOOTP to get its configuration information.

At power-up, the module sends a message with its hardware address to the BOOTP server.

The BOOTP server sends the appropriate configuration to the module.

The BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation lets you assign:

IP address (required)

• subnet mask (recommended)

• gateway address (optional)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-6 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

How to Use This Procedure Use the following table to find the information that you need:

If you have this module:

1756-ENBx

1756-ENET

1794-AENx any

And you want: Then: See page: configure the module via another module that is in the chassis (e.g., controller, 1756-CNB,

1756-DHRIO)

Configure a Module Using RSLogix 5000

Software

or

Configure a Module Using RSLinx

Software

1-7

1-13

configure the module directly over an EtherNet/IP network configure the module re-establish communication because either:

The configuration of the module is incorrect for your network.

You do not know the IP address of the module.

make sure that you can communicate with the module

Note: Both software let you configure the module. Use the one that you prefer.

Configure a Module Using BOOTP

Configure a Module Using BOOTP

Renew the IP Address of a 1794-AENx

Module

Test the Configuration

1-16.

1-16.

1-20.

1-24.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-7

Configure a Module Using

RSLogix 5000 Software

To configure a module using RSLogix 5000 software:

Connect the Hardware

Connect to the Module

Configure the Port

Check the Module

Connect the Hardware

1. Install the module.

2. Connect your computer to a module with which you can already communicate. The module must be in the same chassis as the module that you want to configure.

TIP

To set up communication between your computer

and a controller, see “Connect Directly to a

Controller” on page 1-24.

3. Turn on the power to the module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-8 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Connect to the Module

1. Open the RSLogix 5000



project offline.

42376

2. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

3. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-9

4.

7.

5.

42579

6.

4. Type a name for the module.

5. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

6. How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab?

If: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Then select:

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module

Notes:

If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

7. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

A. Select the IP Address button.

B. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

8. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4.

5.

6.

3.

1-10 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

9. From the File menu, choose Save.

10. Download the project to the controller.

Configure the Port

1. In the controller organizer, right-click the ENB or ENET module and select Properties.

2. Click the Port Configuration tab.

42423

3. Clear (uncheck) the Enable Bootp check box.

4. Type the IP address of the module.

5. Type the subnet mask for the module, if you need one.

6. Type the gateway address for the module, if you need one.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42423

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-11

7. Will you use host names to specify other EtherNet/IP devices?

(I.e., When you send a message or configure a remote ENB or

ENET module, will you use a host name instead of an IP address?)

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Go to step 8.

Go to step 10.

8.

9.

10.

8. .Type the name of the domain of the module.

9. Type the IP address of the server or servers that contain the DNS database for the domain.

10. Choose Set.

A dialog box asks you to confirm your changes.

11. To apply your changes, choose OK.

12. To close the Module Properties dialog box, choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-12 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Check the Module

To make sure that this procedure was successful, look at the front of the module:

For this module:

1756-ENET

1756-ENBx

Check this indicator:

OK LED four character display

For this indication: solid green

IP address of the module

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-13

Configure a Module Using

RSLinx Software

To configure a module using RSLinx software:

Connect the Hardware

Configure the Port

Check the Module

Connect the Hardware

1. Install the module.

2. Connect your computer to a module with which you can already communicate. The module must be in the same chassis as the module that you want to configure.

TIP

To set up communication between your computer and a controller, see “Connect Directly to a

Controller” on page 1-24.

3. Turn on the power to the module.

Configure the Port

1. Start RSLinx software.

To expand a network one level, do one of the following:

Double-click the network.

• Select the network and press the

key.

Click the + sign.

Workstation

+

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-14 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

2. Expand a network until you see the module.

Workstation

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

− xx, 1756-Lx

Backplane, 1756-Ax

+ xx, 1756-ENB

3. Right-click the module and choose Module Configuration.

4. Click the Port Configuration tab.

5.

6.

7.

8.

10.

11.

42472

5. Clear (uncheck) the Obtain IP Address from Bootp Server check box.

6. Type the IP address for the module.

7. Type the subnet mask for the module, if you need one.

8. Type the gateway address for the module, if you need one.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-15

9. Will you use host names to specify other EtherNet/IP devices?

(I.e., When you send a message or configure a remote ENB or

ENET module, will you use a host name instead of an IP address?)

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Go to step 10.

Go to step 12.

10. Type the IP address of the server or servers that contain the DNS database for the domain.

11. Type the name of the domain of the module.

12. Choose OK.

Check the Module

To make sure that this procedure was successful, look at the front of the module:

For this module:

1756-ENET

1756-ENBx

1756-AENx

Check this indicator:

OK LED four character display

NETWORK STATUS

For this indication: solid green

IP address of the module flashing green or steady green

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-16 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Configure a Module Using

BOOTP

To configure a module using BOOTP software:

Install BOOTPServer Software

Connect the Hardware

Enter the Default Network Settings

Configure the Module

Disable BOOTP

Save the Relation List

Install BOOTPServer Software

This procedure requires BOOTPServer software from Rockwell

Automation. You can find the software at either of these locations:

RSLogix 5000 software CD, ENU \ TOOLS \ BootP Utility folder,

BootPServer.exe

• www.ab.com\networks

Connect the Hardware

1. Install the module.

2. Connect the module to the network.

3. Turn on the power to the module.

4. Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Enter the Default Network Settings

1. Start the BOOTPServer software.

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-17

The module sends its Ethernet address to the BOOTP server on a regular basis.

2. From the Tools menu, choose Default Network Settings.

42890

5.

3. Type the subnet mask for the module, if you need one.

4. Type the gateway address for the module, if you need one.

5. Choose OK.

3.

4.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-18 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Configure the Module

The module shows up in the

Relation List.

1.

1. Double-click the address of the module.

42859

2. Type the IP address for the module.

3. Choose OK.

2.

42858

The status line shows that the software sent the address to the module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42860

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-19

Disable BOOTP

Each time you turn on the module, what do you want it to do?

If you want the module to:

Use the same configuration

Then:

Go to step 1.

Request a configuration from a BOOTP server

Go to “Save the

Relation List” on page 1-19.

Notes:

This disables BOOTP for the module. It no longer requests a configuration from BOOTP servers.

This leaves BOOTP enabled for the module. When you turn off the module, it loses its configuration information.

Use this option only when a BOOTP server is continually available to configure the module..

1.

2.

42860

1. In the Relation List, select the module.

2. Choose Disable.

The status line shows that BOOTP is disabled for the module.

42892

Save the Relation List

The relation list contains the configuration that you have just sent to a module. You can use it as a record of the configuration of each module or to re-configure the module in the future.

1. From the File menu, choose Save Relation List.

2. Type or select a file name.

3. Choose Save.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-20 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Renew the IP Address of a

1794-AENx Module

To renew (reset) the IP address of a 1794-AENx module:

Install BOOTPServer Software

Set Up the Hardware

Enter the New Configuration

Send the Configuration

Disable BOOTP

Save the Relation List

Install BOOTPServer Software

To renew the IP address of a 1794-AENx module, use BOOTPServer software from Rockwell Automation. You can find the software at either of these locations:

RSLogix 5000 software CD, ENU \ TOOLS \ BootP Utility folder,

BootPServer.exe

• www.ab.com\networks

Set Up the Hardware

1. Cycle the power to the module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

31247a

00:00:BC:06:00:6A

Ethernet Adapter

2. Write down the Ethernet address of the module.

3. Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module.

2.

Enter the New Configuration

1. Start the BOOTPServer software.

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-21

2. Choose New.

42891

3. Type the Ethernet address of the module

(e.g., 00:00:BC:06:00:6A).

4. Type the IP address for the module.

5. Type the subnet mask for the module, if you need one.

6. Type the gateway address for the module, if you need one.

7. Choose OK.

5.

6.

3.

4.

42860

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-22 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Send the Configuration

1.

2.

1. In the Relation List, select the module.

2. Choose Renew.

The software resets the module and sends the new IP address.

42860

Disable BOOTP

Each time you turn on the module, what do you want it to do?

If you want the module to:

Use the same configuration

Then:

Go to step 1.

Request a configuration from a BOOTP server

Go to “Save the

Relation List” on page 1-23.

Notes:

This disables BOOTP for the module. It no longer requests a configuration from BOOTP servers.

This leaves BOOTP enabled for the module. When you turn off the module, it loses its configuration information.

Use this option only when a BOOTP server is continually available to configure the module..

42860

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-23

1.

2.

42860

1. In the Relation List, select the module.

2. Choose Disable.

The status line shows that BOOTP is disabled for the module.

42892

Save the Relation List

The relation list contains the configuration that you have just sent to a module. You can use it as a record of the configuration of each module or to re-configure the module in the future.

1. From the File menu, choose Save Relation List.

2. Type or select a file name.

3. Choose Save.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-24 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Test the Configuration

Connect Directly to a

Controller

1. If you have not already done so: a. Connect the module to the network.

b. Connect your computer to the same network subnet as the module.

2. From the Windows NT Start menu, select Programs

Command Prompt.

3. Type ping IP_address and press the Enter key.

where:

IP_address is the IP address of the module.

4. Did you receive a reply from the module?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

You have a valid configuration for the module.

Check your configuration.

5. Close the Command Prompt window.

To set up communications between your computer and a controller:

Connect a Serial Cable

Configure a Serial Driver

Connect a Serial Cable

40043

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure an EtherNet/IP Module 1-25

1. Obtain a 1756-CP3 serial cable. (You can also use a 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family, but once the cable is connected you cannot close the controller door.)

I

TIP

If you make your own serial cable:

Limit the length to 15.2m (50 ft).

Wire the connectors as follows:

Workstation Controller

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

Attach the shield to both connectors.

42231

1756-CP3 cable

20884

2. Connect the cable to the controller and to your workstation.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1-26 Configure an EtherNet/IP Module

Configure a Serial Driver

1. Start RSLinx

software.

2. From the Communications menu, select Configure Drivers.

3. From the Available Driver Types list, select RS-232 DF1 Devices.

4. Click Add New.

5. Click OK to accept the default name for the driver.

6. From the Comm Port drop-down list, select the serial port (on the workstation) that the cable is connected to.

7. From the Device drop-down list, select Logix 5550-Serial Port.

8. Click Auto-Configure.

9. Does the dialog box display the following message:

Auto Configuration Successful!

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Click OK .

Go to step 6. and verify that you selected the correct Comm Port.

10. Click Close.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

2

Download and Go Online over an EtherNet/IP

Network

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure when you want to perform any of the following over an EtherNet/IP network:

• download a project

• go online and monitor a controller

• upload a controller

RSLogix 5000 Software eface

ControlLogix Chassis with 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module

42473 switch

How to Use This Procedure

IMPORTANT

Before you use this procedure, configure the

1756-ENBx or -ENET module that is in the chassis

with the controller. Refer to "Configure an

EtherNet/IP Module" on page 1-1.

To complete this procedure, do the following tasks:

Configure an Ethernet Driver

Select a Path

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

2-2 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet/IP Network

Configure an Ethernet

Driver

In this task, you configure an RSLinx driver to communicate with devices on an EtherNet/IP network. You can configure the driver to communicate with up to 63 devices on this network, such as

1756-ENET modules or PLC-5E controllers.

A. Go to RSLinx software.

B. From the Communications menu, choose Configure Drivers.

C. From the Available Driver Types list, choose Ethernet devices.

D. Choose Add New.

E. If you want assign a descriptive name to the driver, change the default name.

F. Choose OK.

G.

H.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42585

G. In the Host Name column, type the IP address or host name of an EtherNet/IP device with which you want to communicate.

Examples:

• aurora6

130.151.136.164

H. Do you want to communicate with another EtherNet/IP device on this network?

If:

Yes

No

I. Choose OK.

J. Choose Close.

Then:

1. Choose Add New .

2. Go to Step G.

Go to the next step.

Select a Path

Download and Go Online over an EtherNet/IP Network 2-3

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project for the controller.

B. From the Communications menu, select Who Active.

To expand a network one level, do one of the following:

Double-click the network.

Select the network and press the

key.

Click the + sign.

Workstation

+

+

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

AB_ETH-x, Ethernet

C. Expand the Ethernet driver to the level of the controller.

Workstation

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

AB_ETH-x, Ethernet

− xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, 1756-ENBx

Backplane, 1756-Ax

+ xx, 1756-Lx

D. Select the controller and choose a button. You may have to confirm the action.

To: monitor the project in the controller transfer a copy of the project from the controller to

RSLogix 5000 software transfer the open project to the controller

Choose:

Go Online

Upload

Download

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

2-4 Download and Go Online over an EtherNet/IP Network

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Before You Begin

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an

EtherNet/IP Network

Chapter

3

Use this procedure to monitor and control devices that wired to 1756

I/O modules:

• local modules

• remote modules where 1756-ENBx or 1756-ENET/B modules connect the local and remote chassis over an EtherNet/IP network

Local I/O Controller Remote I/O

ControlLogix Chassis with 1756-ENBx or

-ENET/B Modules

42608 switch

Before you use this procedure, do the following:

1. To communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP network, you must use 1756-ENBx or -ENET/B modules. If you have a

1756-ENET/A module, determine if you can update the module:

For this 1756-ENET/A revision:

1.18 or later (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the left) earlier than 1.18 (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the right)

Then:

Update the firmware of module to revision 2.6 or later.

Contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor.

2. Configure the ENB or ENET modules in the local and remote

chassis. Refer to "Configure an EtherNet/IP Module" on page 1-1.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-2 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

How to Use This Procedure

IMPORTANT

If the all the I/O modules are in the same chassis as

the controller (no remote I/O), go to Add I/O

Modules on page 3-8.

If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary tasks:

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module

Add the Remote 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module

To complete this procedure, do the following tasks:

Add I/O Modules

Create Aliases

Validate Connections

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network 3-3

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000



project offline.

42376

B. Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I/O configuration of the controller?

If: yes no

Then:

Go to Add the Remote 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module

Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module .

C. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-4 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

D.

G.

E.

42579

F.

D. Type a name for the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

F. How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab?

If: Then select: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module

Notes:

If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

G. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

1. Select the IP Address button.

2. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

H. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

D.

E.

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network 3-5

Add the Remote 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-ENBx local_ENB/ENET

A. Right-click local_ENB/ENET and select New Module.

B. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

C.

42580

F.

C. Type a name for the module. Use a name that identifies the I/O in the chassis.

D. Are most of the modules in the chassis non-diagnostic, digital

I/O modules?

If:

Yes

No

Then select

Rack Optimization

None

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-6 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

H.

42580

G.

G. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

Notes: If: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Then select:

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

H. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

1. Select the IP Address button.

2. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

I. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network 3-7

J.

K.

L.

J. In step

D.

, which Comm Format did you select?

If:

Rack Optimization

None

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

42401

K. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

L. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

M. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-8 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

Add I/O Modules

If: no yes

And it is an: output module input module

In this task, you add I/O modules to the I/O configuration of the controller.

A. Is the module in the I/O configuration of another controller?

And you want to: Then:

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

maintain communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

1. Copy the module from the I/O configuration of the other controller.

2. Paste the module into the I/O configuration of this controller.

3. Go to Create Aliases

Go to the next step.

stop communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-ENBx local_ENB/ENET

Add a local I/O module here.

[x] 1756-ENBx remote_ENB/ENET Add a remote I/O module here.

B. Where is the module located?

If it is in: remote chassis

Then: same chassis as controller right-click I/O Configuration and select New

Module .

right-click the remote ENB or ENET module and select New Module .

C. Select the type of module and click OK.

E.

D.

F.

D. Type a name for the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

42420

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network 3-9

F. Select a Comm Format:

IMPORTANT

If the module is also in the I/O configuration of another controller, then select the Listen

Only version of the Comm Format (e.g., Listen Only - Input Data).

If this module is a: diagnostic digital input

And: And you want to: Then select:

Full Diagnostics - Input Data non-diagnostic digital input diagnostic digital output fused digital output non-diagnostic and non-fused digital output non-isolated analog input isolated or temperature measuring analog input analog output local chassis remote chassis time stamp a change in data omit time stamps schedule when to apply outputs not schedule when to apply outputs schedule when to apply outputs local chassis not schedule when to apply outputs schedule when to apply outputs not schedule when to apply outputs remote chassis floating point mode provides sufficient sample time floating point mode does not provide sufficient sample time

25 ms sample time or greater is sufficient sample time must be less than

25 ms associated inputs are REALs associated inputs are INTs time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp the data echo omit the time stamp time stamp the data echo omit the time stamp

CST Timestamped Input Data

Input Data

Rack Optimization

Full Diagnostics - Scheduled

Output Data

Full Diagnostics - Output Data

CST Timestamped Fuse Data -

Scheduled Output Data

CST Timestamped Fuse Data -

Output Data

Scheduled Output Data

Output Data

Rack Optimization

CST Timestamped Float Data - wiring_mode

Float Data - wiring_mode

CST Timestamped Integer Data - wiring_mode

Integer Data - wiring_mode

CST Timestamped Float Data

Float Data

CST Timestamped Integer Data

Integer Data

CST Timestamped Float Data

Float Data

CST Timestamped Integer Data

Integer Data

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-10 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

G.

42420

G. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

H. Click Next.

I.

J.

K.

42401

I. In step

F.

, did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm

Format?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network 3-11

J. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

K. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

L. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-12 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

Create Aliases

In this task, you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I/O points or channels (devices). As an alias for an I/O point or channel, each tag:

• provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel

• represents the value of the point or channel. When one changes, the other reflects the change.

EXAMPLE

Create aliases

The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names, such as start and motor. Later, the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I/O devices.

start is an alias for the push button that is wired to point 1 of the module that is in slot 2 of the local chassis. When the push button is on, start is on.

motor is an alias for the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 of the module that is in slot 0 of a remote chassis (named conveyor).

When motor turns on, the starter contactor turns on.

stop

<Local:2:I.Data.0> start

<Local:2:I.Data.1> motor

<conveyor:0:O.Data.0>

A. From the Logic menu, select Edit Tags.

motor

<conveyor:0:O.Data.0>

42435

B.

42421

C.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network 3-13

B. Select the scope of the descriptive tag.

C. To the right of the tag name, click the Alias For cell.

The cell displays a â–¼

D. Click the â–¼

E. Click the Controller Scoped Tags button, if it is available. (All the data for I/O modules is at the controller scope.)

F. Select the I/O device that the tag represents:

If the device is: digital analog

Then:

1. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

2. Click the Data member.

3. To the right of the Data member, click â–¼

4. Click the point number of the device.

1. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

2. Scroll down and double-click Chz Data .

Where: name slot

X

Chz

Is: name of the chassis:

If: Then the name is: local remote

Local name of the communication module in the chassis, such as a 1756-ENBx or 1756-CNB module.

slot number of the module type of device:

If: Then: input output

I

O channel that the device is wired to

G. Press the Enter key or click another cell.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-14 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

When you finish, the Tags window should look similar to the following:

Tag Name start

Alias For conveyor:1:I.Data.1(C)

Base Tag conveyor:1:I.Data.1(C) start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis (named conveyor).

TIP

Even if the I/O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format, address the required point as described in step F.

Tag Name start

Alias For conveyor:1:I.Data.1(C)

Base Tag conveyor:I.Slot[1].Data.1(C) start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis (named conveyor).

Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format, a structure associated with the communication module in the remote chassis actually transfers the data.

However, the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the structure for the communication module (e.g., ENB, CNB): start

<conveyor:I.Slot[1].Data.1>

42435

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network 3-15

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3-16 Communicate with 1756 I/O over an EtherNet/IP Network

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an

EtherNet/IP Network

Chapter

4

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure to monitor and control I/O devices that are wired to 1794 I/O modules when a:

1756-ENBx or a 1756-ENET/B module connects the local chassis to a EtherNet/IP network.

1794-AENx module connects the 1794 I/O modules to the same

EtherNet/IP network.

1756-ENBx or -ENET module

1794-AENx module switch 42872

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4-2 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network

Before You Use This

Procedure

Before you use this procedure, do the following:

1. To communicate with I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network, you must use a 1756-ENBx or -ENET/B module in the local chassis. If you have a 1756-ENET/A module, determine if you can update the module:

For this 1756-ENET/A revision:

1.18 or later (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the left) earlier than 1.18 (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the right)

Then:

Update the firmware of module to revision 2.6 or later.

Contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor.

2. Configure the following modules:

ENB or ENET module in the local chassis

AEN module

Refer to "Configure an EtherNet/IP Module" on page 1-1.

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary step:

Add the local 1756-ENBx or -ENET module

To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Add the Remote 1794-AENx Module

Add I/O Modules

Address I/O

To check your work, do the following step:

Validate Connections

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network 4-3

Add the local 1756-ENBx or

-ENET module

1. Open the RSLogix 5000



project offline.

42376

2. Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I/O configuration of the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Go to Add the Remote 1794-AENx Module.

Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module .

3. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4-4 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network

4.

7.

5.

42579

6.

4. Type a name for the module.

5. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

6. How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab?

If: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Then select:

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module

Notes:

If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

7. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

A. Select the IP Address button.

B. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

8. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4.

5.

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network 4-5

Add the Remote 1794-AENx

Module

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-ENBx local_ENB/ENET

1. Right-click local_ENB/ENET and select New Module.

2. Select the type of AEN module that you are using and click OK.

3.

42816

3. Type a name for the module. Use a name that identifies the I/O on this rail.

4. Are most of the modules on this rail digital I/O modules?

If:

Yes

No

Then select

Rack Optimization

None

5. Type or select the number of I/O modules on this rail.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4-6 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network

7.

42816

6.

6. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

7. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

A. Select the IP Address button.

B. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

8. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network 4-7

9.

10.

11.

42401

9. In step

4.

, which Comm Format did you select?

If:

Rack Optimization

None

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device on the rail must update.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

10. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

11. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

12. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4-8 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network

Add I/O Modules

If: no yes

And it is an: output module input module

In this task, you add I/O modules to the I/O configuration of the controller.

1. Is the module in the I/O configuration of another controller?

And you want to: Then:

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

maintain communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

A. Copy the module from the I/O configuration of the other controller.

B. Paste the module into the I/O configuration of this controller.

C. Go to the next task.

Go to the next step.

stop communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-ENBx local_ENB/ENET

− z 1794-AENx/y name_of_rail Add a 1794 I/O module here.

2. Right-click the AEN module and select New Module.

3. Select the type of module and click OK.

5.

4.

6.

42420

4. Type a name for the module.

5. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

7.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

If this module is a: digital input digital input/output digital output analog

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network 4-9

6. Select a Comm Format:

IMPORTANT

If the module is also in the I/O configuration of another controller, then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format (e.g., Listen Only - Input Data).

And the:

Comm Format of the AEN is

Rack Optimization

Comm Format of the AEN is

None

Comm Format of the AEN is

Rack Optimization

Comm Format of the AEN is

None

Comm Format of the AEN is

Rack Optimization

Comm Format of the AEN is

None

And the module must: update at the RPI of the AEN update faster than the RPI of the

AEN

Then select:

Rack Optimization

Input Data

Input Data update at the RPI of the AEN update faster than the RPI of the

AEN

Rack Optimization

Data

Data update at the RPI of the AEN update faster than the RPI of the

AEN

Rack Optimization

Output Data

Output Data

Data

7. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

8. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4-10 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network

9.

10.

11.

42401

9. In step

6.

, did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm

Format?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

10. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

11. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

12. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Address I/O

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network 4-11 analog input analog output

To monitor or control an I/O device, assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic:

For step-by-step instructions on how to enter logic and tag names, see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures, publication 1756-PM001.

All the data for I/O modules is at the controller scope. As you assign addresses, click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I/O tags.

Use the following table to select the address of an I/O device:

If the device is: digital

And it Comm Format is:

Data (e.g., Input Data, Output

Data)

Rack Optimization

Then use this address: name:slot:type.

Data .bit

name:slot:type. bit name:slot:type.Ch# InputData name:slot:type.Ch# OutputData

Where: name slot type bit

Ch#

Is: name of the adapter module on the rail, such as an AEN or ACN module slot number of the I/O module type of device:

If: Then: input output

I

O point (bit) number of the device channel that the device is wired to

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4-12 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network

When you choose rack optimization for an I/O module, its tags are created as aliases for the tags of the adapter module. In your logic, you see the tag of the device as aliases for a tag of the adapter module. (The tag name of the adapter is in angle brackets.) tag name of the adapter tag name of the I/O device conveyor:2:I.0

<conveyor:I.Data[2].0>

42435

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network 4-13

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4-14 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over an EtherNet/IP Network

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Chapter

5

Communicate with Another Controller over an

EtherNet/IP Network

When to Use This

Procedure

ControlLogix Controller

Use this procedure to transfer data from one controller to another controller over an EtherNet/IP network:

ControlLogix controller to another ControlLogix controller

ControlLogix controller to a PLC-5E

®

or SLC 5/05

controller

PLC-5E or SLC 5/05 controller to a ControlLogix controller

ControlLogix Controller

1

Before You Begin switch

PLC-5E Controller SLC 5/05 Controller

42607

Before you use this procedure, do the following:

1. To produce and consume tags over an EtherNet/IP network, you must use 1756-ENBx or -ENET/B modules. If you have a

1756-ENET/A module, determine if you can update the module:

For this 1756-ENET/A revision:

1.18 or later (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the left) earlier than 1.18 (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the right)

Then:

Update the firmware of module to revision 2.6 or later.

Contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor.

2. Configure the ENB or ENET modules. Refer to "Configure an

EtherNet/IP Module" on page 1-1.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-2 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

Select a Communication

Method

If the other controller is:

ControlLogix

PLC-5

SLC 5/05

To communicate with another controller, you have the following options:

And:

The data needs delivery at a specific rate.

The data is sent when a specific condition in your application occurs.

The ControlLogix controller sends the message.

The PLC-5 or SLC 5/05 sends the message.

Then:

Produce and consume a tag. Go to Produce a Tag on page 5-3.

Send a message. Go to Add the Local 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module on page 5-14.

Send a message. Go to Add the Local 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module on page 5-14.

Send a message. Go to Access ControlLogix Data on page 5-23.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Produce a Tag

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-3

A. Open the RSLogix 5000™ project for the controller that produces

(sends) the data.

B. From the Logic menu, select Edit Tags.

IMPORTANT

To produce a tag, the tag must meet be:

• controller scope

• one of these data types:

DINT

REAL

array of DINTs or REALs

user-defined

• less than or equal to 500 bytes

If the tag does not meet these requirements, reorganize the tag.

C. From Scope, select name_of_controller (controller). (Only tags that are controller scope can produce data.)

D. Select the tag that will produce the data and press the

ALT + Enter keys.

E.

F.

42352

E. Select the Produced option button.

F. Type or select the number of controllers that will consume

(receive) the tag.

G. Choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-4 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000



project for the controller that consumes (receives) the data.

42376

B. Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I/O configuration of the controller?

If: yes no

Then:

Go to the next step.

Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module .

C. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-5

D.

G.

E.

42579

F.

D. Type a name for the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

F. How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab?

If: Then select: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module

Notes:

If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

G. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

1. Select the IP Address button.

2. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

H. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

D.

E.

5-6 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

Add the Remote 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-ENBx local_ENB/ENET

A. Right-click local_ENB/ENET and select New Module.

B. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

C.

42580

F.

C. Type a name for the module. Use a name that identifies the I/O in the chassis.

D. Are most of the modules in the chassis non-diagnostic, digital

I/O modules?

If:

Yes

No

Then select

Rack Optimization

None

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-7

H.

42580

G.

G. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

Notes: If: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Then select:

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

H. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

1. Select the IP Address button.

2. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

I. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-8 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

J.

K.

L.

J. In step

D.

, which Comm Format did you select?

If:

Rack Optimization

None

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

42401

K. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

L. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

M. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-9

Add the Other Controller

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-ENBx local_ENB/ENET

[x] 1756-ENBx remote_ENB/ENET

A. Right-click remote_ENB/ENET and select New Module.

B. Select the type of controller and choose OK.

D.

C.

C. Type the name of the controller.

D. Type or select the slot number of the controller:

E. Click Next.

42377

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-10 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

F.

G.

F. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

42398

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

To make it easier to test a system one module or section at a time:

1. Initially, inhibit all the modules.

2. To test a section of the system, clear the check boxes for the modules of that section

(i.e., uninhibit the modules).

G. If communication fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a modules fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

H. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Consume a Tag

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-11

In RSLogix 5000 software:

A. From the Logic menu, select Edit Tags.

B. From Scope, select name_of_controller (controller). (Only tags that are controller scope can consume other tags.)

C. Select the tag in this controller that will consume the produced tag and press the ALT + Enter keys.

F.

G.

D.

E.

H.

D. Select the Consumed option button.

E. Select the controller that contains the produced tag.

F. Type the name of the produced tag.

G. Select the same data type as the produced tag.

H. Type or select the time between updates of the tag. Use the highest value permissible for your application.

I. Choose OK.

42353

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-12 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-13

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

E. Go to step A.

Does Another Controller

Require the Data?

Multiple controllers can consume a produced tag:

If: no other controller requires the data

Then: another controller requires the same data

Go to Add the Local 1756-ENBx or -ENET

Module on page 5-4.

You are done. Skip the rest of this procedure.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-14 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000



project for the ControlLogix controller that sends the message.

42376

B. Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I/O configuration of the controller?

If: yes no

Then:

Go to Enter a Message

Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module .

C. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-15

D.

G.

E.

42579

F.

D. Type a name for the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

F. How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab?

If: Then select: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module

Notes:

If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

G. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

1. Select the IP Address button.

2. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

H. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-16 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

Enter a Message e e e e e e condition ?

/ e e e e e condition ?

/

A. Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction (s).

Message

Message Control

MSG

? ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

B. In the MSG instruction, type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key.

C. In the MSG instruction, right-click the message control tag and select New tag_name. (In older revisions of the software, the menu option is Create tag_name.

)

D. From the Scope list, select name_of_controller (controller), and click OK.

E.

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

E. Enter message.

EN.

where: message is the message control tag from step B.

F. If your message is to a PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

controller and it reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-17

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE condition

Read integers from a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos]

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE e condition

Write integers to a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller.

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression fal_control

?

0 all int_buffer[fal_control.pos] dint_array[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42424

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-18 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

Configure the Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. Select a configuration for the message:

Table 5.A Message to a ControlLogix controller

If you want to: read (receive) the data write (send) the data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

CIP Data Table Read first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

CIP Data Table Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer first element of the tag for the data in the other controller

Table 5.B Message to a SLC 500 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data floating-point (REAL) write (send) data read (receive) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag write (send) data Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

SLC Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10)

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

SLC Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-19

Table 5.C Message to a PLC-5 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data write (send) data floating-point (REAL) read (receive) data write (send) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

PLC5 Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10)

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0)

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. Click Browse …

E. Is the other controller in the I/O configuration?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

1. Select the other controller and choose OK .

2. Go to step K.

Select the ENB or ENET module and choose OK .

F. In the Path text box, type a comma [ , ].

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-20 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

G. Type the port number from which the message exits:

For this port: backplane port from a 1756 controller or module

DF1 port from a 1756-L1 controller

ControlNet port from a 1756-CNB module

EtherNet/IP port from a ENB or ENET module

DH+ port over channel A from a 1756-DHRIO module

DH+ port over channel B from a 1756-DHRIO module

Specify:

1

2

3

H. Type a comma [ , ].

I. Type the address of the next hardware device (e.g., controller, module):

For a device on a:

ControlLogix backplane

DF1 network

ControlNet network

DH+ network

EtherNet/IP network

Specify: slot number station address (0-254) node number (1-99 decimal)

8# followed by the node number (1-77 octal)

For example, to specify an octal node address of 37, type 8#37

IP address (four decimal numbers separated by periods) or host name

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-21

J. Repeat steps F. through I. until you have specified the

destination controller.

The following examples depicts a communication path:

EXAMPLE

Communication path from a Logix5000 controller to a Logix5000 controller over an EtherNet/IP network

5

5

5

0

E

N

E

T

Ethernet network

Message

5

5

5

0

E

N

E

T

IP address

127.127.127.12

washer, 2, 127.127.127.12, 1, 0 where: washer

2

127.127.127.12

1

0 indicates: name of the ENB or ENET module

Ethernet port of the ENB or ENET module

IP address of the ENB or ENET module in the destination chassis backplane port of the ENB or ENET module in the destination chassis slot number of the destination controller

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-22 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

If the message is to a:

PLC-5 controller

SLC 500 controller

Logix5000 controller:

ControlLogix controller

FlexLogix controller

K. Complete the communication parameters:

Then:

1. Leave the CIP button selected.

2. Disregard the Cache Connection check box.

How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send messages to?

If: Then:

16 or less Logix5000 controllers more than 16

Logix5000 controllers

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

1. Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the most frequent messages.

2. Is this message to one of those controllers?

If:

Yes

No

Then

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

Clear the Cache Connection check box.

Stagger the Messages

L. Click OK.

As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network 5-23

Access ControlLogix Data Complete this task for any message that a PLC-5 or SLC 5/05 controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over an EtherNet/IP network.

IMPORTANT This procedure uses RSLogix 5

or RSLogix 500

™ software, revision 3.x.

A. Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software, as required, open the project for the PLC-5 or SLC 5/05 controller.

B. If the message is from a SLC 5/05 controller, in the MSG instruction, select PLC5.

Read/Write Message

Type Peer-To-Peer

Read/Write Read

Target Device

Local/Remote

Control Block

Control Block Length

Setup Screen

PLC5

Local

N7:0

93

42474

If the controller is a:

PLC-5

For this section:

This PLC-5

SLC 500

Target Device

This Controller

Target Device

C. Display the set-up screen for the message.

D. Specify the following parameters:

And this item: Specify:

Communication Command

Data Table Address

Size in Elements

Port Number

Data Table Address

MultiHop

Communication Command

Data Table Address

Size in Elements

Channel

Data Table Address

MultiHop

PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5 Typed Write starting address of the data in the PLC-5 controller number of elements to read or write

2

Type, in quotation marks [“ “], the name of the tag in the

ControlLogix controller (e.g., “count”).

Select Yes .

PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller number of elements to read or write

1

Type, in quotation marks [“ “], the name of the tag in the

ControlLogix controller (e.g., “count”).

Select Yes .

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

5-24 Communicate with Another Controller over an EtherNet/IP Network

E. Click the MultiHop tab.

42425

F. Type the IP address of the ENB or ENET module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller.

G. Type the slot number of the ControlLogix controller.

F.

G.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Chapter

6

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal

Over a EtherNet/IP Network

Use this procedure to exchange data between a PanelView terminal and a ControlLogix controller over a EtherNet/IP network.

Before You Begin

42817 switch

Before you use this procedure, do the following:

1. To produce and consume tags over an EtherNet/IP network, you must use a 1756-ENBx or -ENET/B module. If you have a

1756-ENET/A module, determine if you can update the module:

For this 1756-ENET/A revision:

1.18 or later (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the left) earlier than 1.18 (latch of the RJ--45 connector points to the right)

Then:

Update the firmware of module to revision 2.6 or later.

Contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor.

2. Configure the ENB or ENET module in the local chassis. Refer to "Configure an EtherNet/IP Module" on page 1-1.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-2 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary task:

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or -ENET Module

To complete this procedure, do the following tasks:

Add the PanelView Terminal

Organize Your Data

Configure the PanelView Terminal

Create PanelView Tags

To check your work, do the following task:

Validate Connections

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network 6-3

Add the Local 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module

1. Open the RSLogix 5000



project offline.

42376

2. Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I/O configuration of the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Go to Add the PanelView Terminal.

Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module .

3. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-4 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

4.

7.

5.

42579

6.

4. Type a name for the module.

5. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

6. How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab?

If: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Then select:

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module

Notes:

If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

7. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

A. Select the IP Address button.

B. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

8. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Add the PanelView

Terminal

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network 6-5

You can establish up to eight connections (instances) with each

PanelView terminal. For example, one controller can use all eight instances. Or eight controllers can each use one instance.

Each PanelView instance gives you:

100 DINTs of input data

100 DINTs of output data

For each instance, complete the following steps:

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-ENBx local_ENB/ENET

1. Right-click local_ENB/ENET and select New Module.

2. Select ETHERNET-MODULE and choose OK.

3.

4.

5.

3. Type a name for this PanelView instance.

4. Select Data - DINT.

5. Select the IP Address button and type the IP address of the

PanelView terminal.

42820

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-6 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

6.

7.

42820

6. Type the assembly instance numbers for this PanelView instance

.

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

For this instance number:

11

13

15

17

19

21

7

9

Type this Input Assembly

Instance:

10

12

14

16

18

20

6

8

Type this Output Assembly

Instance:

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Type this Configuration

Assembly Instance:

7. Type the following sizes for the input, output, and

configuration data:

For this size:

Input

Output

Configuration

Type:

100

100

1

8. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network 6-7

9.

10.

11.

42401

9. Type the rate that you want time-critical data to transfer with the

PanelView terminal.

10. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

11. If communication with the modules fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

Then: Notes: If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

12. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-8 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

Organize Your Data Organize your data for the PanelView based on how the data is used.

For data that is: time-critical (e.g., controls a machine)

Do this:

Use the I/O tags of the PanelView.

not time critical

The tags for this data were created when you added the PanelView to the I/O configuration

of the controller. They are similar to the tags of I/O modules. See Table 6.A.

Create arrays to store the data:

1. For each PanelView screen, create a BOOL array with enough elements for the bit-level objects on the screen.

For example, the BOOL[32] array gives you 32 bits for push buttons, indicators, etc.

2. For each PanelView screen, create a DINT array with enough elements for the word-level objects on the screen.

For example, the DINT[28] array, give you 28 values for numeric entry controls, numeric displays, etc.

To access the I/O tags of the PanelView, use the following address format:

Table 6.A Address format for the I/O tags of a PanelView

If the:

PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data

Then use this address: name_of_panelview:I.Data[x].y name_of_panelview:O.Data[x].y

Where: Is: name_of_panelview name of the PanelView instance in the I/O configuration of the controller x y element of the PanelView input (I) or output (O) structure.

bit number within the input or output element

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network 6-9

To address the PanelView data in your logic, you can have the following options:

• address the tags directly

• copy the tags to other tags in your project

• create alias tags

EXAMPLE

Address PanelView data

This rung uses these I/O tags of the PanelView: pv_a:I.Data[2].0 and pv_a:I.Data[2].1. The rung controls a motor.

When a push button on the PanelView is pressed, this rung clears a value. The push button uses bit 4 of the screen_a_bit array.

This rung moves counter.ACC (a DINT value) to element 5 of the screen_a_DINT array. A numeric display on the PanelView shows the value.

alarm_ack and alarm are aliases for the I/O tags of the PanelView.

42857

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-10 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

Configure the PanelView

Terminal

1. Start PanelBuilder32 software.

2. Open an existing PanelBuilder application or create a new application.

3. From the Application menu, select Settings.

4. Click the Comms Setup button.

5.

42818

5. Click the Ethernet Config button.

6.

7.

8.

9.

42819

6. Clear (uncheck) the DHCP Enable check box.

7. Type the IP address of the PanelView terminal.

8. Type the subnet mask for the PanelView terminal, if necessary.

9. Type the gateway address for the PanelView terminal, if necessary.

10. Choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network 6-11

11. Under Node Name, right-click End of Node List and select Insert

Node.

42818

12.

12. Select ControlLogix5000.

13.

42818

14.

15.

13. Type a name for the ControlLogix controller.

14. Type the IP address of the ENB or ENET module that is in the chassis with the controller.

15. Type the path to the ControlLogix controller. Use the following format: space

1 controller_slot where: controller_slot is the slot number of the ControlLogix controller.

16. Click OK.

17. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-12 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

Create PanelView Tags 1. On the PanelView screen, create the required object.

2. Double-click the object.

3. Click the Edit Tag button.

4.

6.

5.

7.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42856

4. Type a name for the object

5. In the ControlLogix controller, is the address of this tag a bit

(BOOL) within an array of BOOLs

?

If:

Yes

No

Then select: bit data type that matches the data type of the tag in the ControlLogix controller

6. Is this data time-critical (e.g., turn a machine on or off)?

If:

No

Yes

Then select:

A. Network Address

B. From the Node Name list, select the controller.

Assembly Object

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network 6-13

7. Specify the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller:

Specify: If the message type is:

Network Address

Assembly Object

And its data type is: bit

And the:

DINT

PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data

PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data array_name[element]

AI x:y/z

AO x:y/z

AI x:y

AO x:y y z

Where: array_name element x instance number of this connection with the controller

If the input assembly instance is:

7

9

11

Is: name of the array in the controller element number within the array

And the output assembly instance is:

6

8

10

13

15

17

12

14

16

19

21

18

20 element of the PanelView input or output structure in the controller

7

8 bit number within the input or output element

4

5

6

1

2

3

Then the instance number is:

EXAMPLE

Specify the address of a tag in the ControlLogix controller

ControlLogix Controller: name_of_panelview:I.Data[0].1

name_of_panelview:O.Data[3] screen_a[5]

PanelView Application:

AI1:0/1

AO1:3 screen_a[5]

8. Click OK.

9. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-14 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network 6-15

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

6-16 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a EtherNet/IP Network

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

7

Communicate with an RSView Project over an

EtherNet/IP Network

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure to communicate with tags in either of the following types of RSView projects:

RSView32 project.

RSView Machine Edition project (developed with RSView Studio software)

RSView32 or RSView

ControlLogix Chassis with 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module

42473 switch

How to Use This Procedure

IMPORTANT

Before you use this procedure, configure the

1756-ENBx or -ENET module that is in the chassis

with the controller. Refer to "Configure an

EtherNet/IP Module" on page 1-1.

To communicate with an RSView project, you have two options:

If the data: needs regular delivery at a rate that you specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in your application

Then use a: polled message unsolicited message

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-2 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Configure an Ethernet

Driver

In this task, you configure an RSLinx driver to communicate with devices on an EtherNet/IP network. You can configure the driver to communicate with up to 63 devices on this network, such as

1756-ENET modules or PLC-5E controllers.

A. Go to RSLinx software.

B. From the Communications menu, choose Configure Drivers.

C. From the Available Driver Types list, choose Ethernet devices.

D. Choose Add New.

E. If you want assign a descriptive name to the driver, change the default name.

F. Choose OK.

G.

H.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42585

G. In the Host Name column, type the IP address or host name of an EtherNet/IP device with which you want to communicate.

Examples:

• aurora6

130.151.136.164

H. Do you want to communicate with another EtherNet/IP device on this network?

If:

Yes

No

I. Choose OK.

J. Choose Close.

Then:

1. Choose Add New .

2. Go to Step G.

Go to the next step.

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-3

Select a Communication

Method

Select a method for transferring the data:

If the data: needs regular delivery at a rate that you specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in your application

Then go to:

"Create a Polled Topic" on page 7-4

"Create a Unsolicited Topic" on page 7-14

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-4 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Create a Polled Topic

TIP

RSLogix 5000 software, revision 10.0 or later, automatically creates DDE/OPC topics in RSLinx software whenever you:

• create a project

• save a project

• change the revision of a project to 10.0 or later

In some cases, you have to update the data source for the topic in RSLinx software, as shown in

steps E - G of this section.

A. Display RSLinx software.

B. From the DDE/OPC menu, select Topic Configuration …

C. In the bottom left corner of the window, click New.

D. Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key.

To expand a network one level, do one of the following:

Double-click the network.

Select the network and press the

key.

Click the + sign.

Data Source

Workstation

+

AB_ETH-x, Ethernet

E. On the Data Source tab, expand the AB_ETH-x driver until you see the ControlLogix controller.

Data Source

Workstation

AB_ETH-x, Ethernet

− xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, 1756-ENBx

Backplane, 1756-Ax

+ xx, 1756-Lx

F. Select the ControlLogix controller.

G. Choose Apply and confirm the update.

H. Click the Data Collection tab.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

J. Click the Use

Symbols check box.

43083

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-5

42429

I. Type the update rate (ms) for the data.

L.

K.

K. Select RSLogix 5000 (*acd).

L. Select the RSLogix 5000 project for this topic.

M. Choose Open.

N. Choose Done and then Yes.

43083

M.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-6 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Create a Polled Node A. Open the RSView project.

B.

43081

B. Double-click Node.

C.

D.

C. Click OPC Server.

D. Type a name for the node.

G. Click Accept.

H. Click Close.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

43082

E.

42430

Import Logix5000 Tags

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-7

To import tags from an RSLogix 5000 project into your RSView project, use the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility:

Create an .L5K File

Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility

Use the Utility to Create a .CSV File

Import the .CSV File

Create an .L5K File

A. Open the RSLogix 5000 project that contains the tags that you want to access.

B. From the File menu, choose Save As.

C.

C. Select RSLogix 5000 Import/Export File (*.L5K).

D. Choose Save.

43070

D.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-8 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility

A. Get your RSLogix 5000 software CD.

B. On the CD, find the following file: language \Tools\Tag Import

Utility\Logix+5000+Tag+Import.msi.

where: language is the language of your software. For example, for software that is in English, open the Enu folder.

C. Copy the file to your computer.

D. To install the utility, open the file.

Use the Utility to Create a .CSV File

A. Start the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility.

B.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C.

D.

E.

F.

B. Type the name of the node from "Create a Polled Node."

C. Select the .L5K file.

D. Choose Search.

43071

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-9

E. Select the tags to import.

F. Type the name of the topic from "Create a Polled Topic."

G. Choose OK.

H. Choose Save.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-10 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Import the .CSV File

A. Start the Database Import & Export wizard:

Start

Programs

Rockwell Software

RSView Studio

Tools

Database Import & Export Wizard

Start

Programs

Rockwell Software

RSView32 Tools

Database Import & Export Wizard

B. Complete the screens of the wizard:

Import RSView CSV files or

Import RSView Studio CSV files

Next >

CSV file

Next > your option

Next >

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-11

RSView project

Next >

Finish

All correct?

Correct?

OK

43072

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-12 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Create a Polled Tag To create RSView tags one tag at a time:

A.

43081

A. Double-click Tag Database.

B. Click New.

43082

C.

C. Specify the properties of the tag.

D.

E.

G.

42431

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42432

D. Click Device.

F. Select the name of the node that you created in “Create a Polled

Node” and click OK.

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-13

+

(Node: <Local> )

H. Click the + sign.

(Node: <Local> )

+

+ topic_1 topic_2

I. Next to the topic from “Create a Polled Topic,” click the + sign.

tags in the offline RSLogix 5000 project tags in the ControlLogix controller

(Node: <Local> )

+

− topic_1 topic_2

+

+

Offline

Online

J. Next to Offline, click the + sign.

controller scope tags

(Node: <Local> )

+

− topic_1 topic_2

Offline arrays and structures at the controller scope array_1 counter_1 program scope tags

+

Program:MainProgram

+

Online

K. On the left, select the entry that contains the required tag

(address).

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-14 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

controller scope tags

(Node: <Local> )

+

− topic_1 topic_2

Offline arrays and structures at the controller scope array_1 counter_1 program scope tags

+

Program:MainProgram

+

Online bool_1 dint_1 real_1 single element tags

(BOOLs,

DINTs,

REALs, etc.)

L. On the right, double-click the tag that contains the required data

(i.e., the address for the RSView tag).

M. Click Accept.

N. If this is an RSView32 project, go to Validate an RSView32 Tag.

Create a Unsolicited Topic A. Display RSLinx software.

B. From the Communications menu, select Configure Client

Applications.

C. Click the Virtual Link ID tab.

D. Do you want to use the same Virtual Link ID for each workstation in your system? (Node or IP addresses are sufficient to distinguish between workstations.)

If:

Yes

No

Then:

1. Record the Virtual Link ID number, which you will use in subsequent steps.

2. Click OK .

1. Enter a unique Virtual Link ID for the workstation.

2. Click OK .

3. Close the RSLinx software. (If you configured RSLinx software to start as a service, you must also stop the service.)

4. Re-open the RSLinx software.

E. From the DDE/OPC menu, select Topic Configuration …

F. In the bottom left corner of the window, click New.

G. Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-15

H. Click the Data Collection tab.

I. Specify the following parameters:

For this item:

Processor Type

Data Collection Mode

Do this:

Select PLC-5 .

1. Clear the Polled Messages check box.

2. Select the Unsolicited Messages check box.

J. Click the Advanced Communication tab.

K. Specify the following parameters:

For this item:

Communication Driver

Station

Local or Remote Addressing

Type or select: driver for the network across which you will send the message slot number of the controller that is sending the message

Remote

L. In the Remote Routing Configuration dialog box, specify the following parameters:

For this parameter:

Bridge Device

Local ID

Local KA5

Remote ID

Type or select:

1785-KA5 Bridge/5130-KA

Virtual Link ID from Step D.

arbitrary number between 1 and 107 (RSLinx requires an entry but this configuration does not use the entry.) number that designates the backplane of the

ControlLogix chassis (Use a different number for each backplane.)

M. Click OK.

N. Click Done and confirm the update of the topic.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-16 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Add the 1756-ENBx or

-ENET Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000



project offline.

42376

B. Is the local ENB or ENET module already in the I/O configuration of the controller?

If: yes no

Then:

Go to Enter a Message

Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module .

C. Select your type of ENB or ENET module and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-17

D.

G.

E.

42579

F.

D. Type a name for the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

F. How closely must any module that is installed in this slot match the information on this tab?

If: Then select: all information must match:

• type

• catalog number

• vendor

• major and minor revision number

Exact Match all information except the minor revision number Compatible Module

Notes:

If you select Compatible Module , you can still replace a 1756-ENET/B module with a 1756-ENBT module. However, you cannot replace an ENBT module with an ENET/B module.

no information must match Disable Keying

G. Type the IP address or host name of the module:

To specify an:

IP address host name

Do this:

1. Select the IP Address button.

2. Type the IP address

Type the host name

Example:

130.151.136.164

aurora6

H. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-18 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Enter a Message e e e e e e condition ?

/ e e e e e condition ?

/

A. Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction (s).

Message

Message Control

MSG

? ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

B. In the MSG instruction, type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key.

C. In the MSG instruction, right-click the message control tag and select New tag_name. (In older revisions of the software, the menu option is Create tag_name.

)

D. From the Scope list, select name_of_controller (controller), and click OK.

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

E. Enter message.

EN.

where: message

is the message control tag from step B.

F. If your message reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

In this procedure, you use a PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5

Typed Write message, which requires 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-19

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE condition

Read integers from an RSView project

When condition turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos]

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE e condition

Write integers to an RSView project

When condition turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the

RSView project.

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression fal_control

?

0 all int_buffer[fal_control.pos] dint_array[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42424

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-20 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Configure the Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. On the Configuration tab, specify the following parameters:

Table 7.1 Message to a RSView project

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data floating-point (REAL) write (send) data read (receive) data write (send) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

PLC5 Typed Read logical address, such as N7:0 number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

PLC5 Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer logical address, such as N7:0

PLC5 Typed Read logical address, such as F8:0 number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer logical address, such as F8:0

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. Click Browse …

E. Select the ENB or ENET and click OK.

F. In the Path text box, add:

, 2, address where: address is the IP address or DNS name of the workstation.

EXAMPLE

Complete path entry washer_chassis, 2, 130.130.128.4

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-21

G. On the Communication tab, specify the following parameters:

For this item:

Communication Method

Source Link

Destination Link

Destination Node

Type or select:

CIP With Source ID

Remote ID from “Create a Unsolicited Topic,

step L.”

Virtual Link ID from “Create a Unsolicited Topic, step D.”

77 (RSLinx reserves node 77 for DDE topics.)

H. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-22 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

Create an Unsolicited Node A. Open the RSView project.

D.

B.

43081

B. Double-click Node.

C.

43082

E.

42430

C. Click OPC Server.

D. Type a name for the node.

G. In the Access Path box, type the name of the topic from “Create a Unsolicited Topic.”

H. Click Accept.

I. Click Close.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network 7-23

Create an Unsolicited Tag

A.

43081

A. Double-click Tag Database.

B. Click New.

43082

C.

42431

C. Specify the properties of the tag.

D.

E.

G.

D. Click Device.

F. Select the name of the node that you created in “Create an

Unsolicited Node” and click OK.

42432

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

7-24 Communicate with an RSView Project over an EtherNet/IP Network

G. Type the address for the tag:

If the controller: writes the value reads the value

Then type the: destination address that you specified in the MSG instruction source address that you specified in the MSG instruction

H. Click Accept.

Validate an RSView32 Tag This procedure applies only to RSView32 projects.

A. On the Edit Mode tab, double-click Tag Monitor.

Tag Name Value State

B. Type the name of the RSView tag and press the Enter key.

Tag Name tag_name

Value State

C. What does the State column display?

If: valid error

Then:

The tag contains a valid value from the controller.

There is a communication problem, such as the:

• controller is not available

• server is not running

If a MSG instruction reads or writes the value, you will see error until the controller sends the message for the first time.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

8

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a

ControlNet™ Network

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure to monitor and control devices that are wired to

1756 I/O modules:

• local modules

• remote modules where 1756-CNB modules connect the local and remote chassis over a ControlNet network.

Controller Local I/O Remote I/O

ControlNet Network

ControlLogix Chassis with 1756-CNB

Modules

42045

How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

IMPORTANT

If the all the I/O modules are in the same chassis as

the controller (no remote I/O), go to Add I/O

Modules on page 8-6.

Add the Local 1756-CNB Module

Add the Remote 1756-CNB Module

Add I/O Modules

Create Aliases

Schedule the ControlNet Network

Validate Connections

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-2 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

Add the Local 1756-CNB

Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

D.

42376

B. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

C. Select your type of CNB and click OK.

E.

F.

D. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_local_cnb ).

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

42377

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network 8-3

H.

I.

42398

H. Initially, do you want to the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

I. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-4 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

Add the Remote 1756-CNB

Module

C.

F.

42399

A. Right-click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module.

B. Select the type of CNB that is in the remote chassis and click OK.

H.

42404

C. Type a name for the CNB module. Use a name that identifies the

I/O in the chassis.

D. Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module.

E. Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis.

F. Are most of the modules in the chassis non-diagnostic, digital

I/O modules?

If:

Yes

No

Then select

Rack Optimization

None

G. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

H. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

I. Click Next.

D.

E.

G.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network 8-5

J.

K.

L.

J. In step

F.

, which Comm Format did you select?

If:

Rack Optimization

None

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update.

Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5 ms, type a rate of 5,

10, 20 ms, etc.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

42401

K. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

L. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

M. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-6 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

Add I/O Modules

If: no yes

And it is an: output module input module

In this task, you add I/O modules to the I/O configuration of the controller.

A. Is the module in the I/O configuration of another controller?

And you want to: Then:

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

maintain communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

1. Copy the module from the I/O configuration of the other controller.

2. Paste the module into the I/O configuration of this controller.

3. Go to Create Aliases

Go to the next step.

stop communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-CNB/x name_of_local_CNB

Add a local I/O module here.

z [x] 1756-CNB/x name_of_remote_CNB Add a remote I/O module here.

B. Where is the module located?

If it is in: Then: same chassis as controller right-click I/O Configuration and select New

Module .

remote chassis right-click the remote 1756-CNB module and select

New Module .

C. Select the type of module and click OK.

E.

D.

F.

D. Type a name for the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

42420

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network 8-7

F. Select a Comm Format:

IMPORTANT

If the module is also in the I/O configuration of another controller, then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format (e.g., Listen Only - Input Data).

If this module is a: diagnostic digital input

And: And you want to: Then select:

Full Diagnostics - Input Data non-diagnostic digital input diagnostic digital output fused digital output non-diagnostic and non-fused digital output non-isolated analog input isolated or temperature measuring analog input analog output local chassis remote chassis local chassis time stamp a change in data omit time stamps schedule when to apply outputs not schedule when to apply outputs schedule when to apply outputs not schedule when to apply outputs schedule when to apply outputs not schedule when to apply outputs remote chassis floating point mode provides sufficient sample time floating point mode does not provide sufficient sample time

25 ms sample time or greater is sufficient sample time must be less than

25 ms associated inputs are REALs associated inputs are INTs time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp when the data is sampled omit the time stamp time stamp the data echo omit the time stamp time stamp the data echo omit the time stamp

CST Timestamped Input Data

Input Data

Rack Optimization

Full Diagnostics - Scheduled

Output Data

Full Diagnostics - Output Data

CST Timestamped Fuse Data -

Scheduled Output Data

CST Timestamped Fuse Data -

Output Data

Scheduled Output Data

Output Data

Rack Optimization

CST Timestamped Float Data - wiring_mode

Float Data - wiring_mode

CST Timestamped Integer Data - wiring_mode

Integer Data - wiring_mode

CST Timestamped Float Data

Float Data

CST Timestamped Integer Data

Integer Data

CST Timestamped Float Data

Float Data

CST Timestamped Integer Data

Integer Data

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-8 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

G.

42420

G. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

H. Click Next.

I.

J.

K.

42401

I. In step

F.

, did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm

Format?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update.

Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5 ms, type a rate of 5,

10, 20 ms, etc.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network 8-9

J. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

K. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

L. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-10 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

Create Aliases In this task, you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I/O points or channels (devices). As an alias for an I/O point or channel, each tag:

• provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel

• represents the value of the point or channel. When one changes, the other reflects the change.

EXAMPLE

Create aliases

The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names, such as start and motor. Later, the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I/O devices.

start is an alias for the push button that is wired to point 1 of the module that is in slot 2 of the local chassis. When the push button is on, start is on.

motor is an alias for the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 of the module that is in slot 0 of a remote chassis (named conveyor).

When motor turns on, the starter contactor turns on.

stop

<Local:2:I.Data.0> start

<Local:2:I.Data.1> motor

<conveyor:0:O.Data.0>

A. From the Logic menu, select Edit Tags.

motor

<conveyor:0:O.Data.0>

42435

B.

42421

C.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network 8-11

B. Select the scope of the descriptive tag.

C. To the right of the tag name, click the Alias For cell.

The cell displays a â–¼

D. Click the â–¼

E. Click the Controller Scoped Tags button, if it is available. (All the data for I/O modules is at the controller scope.)

F. Select the I/O device that the tag represents:

If the device is: digital analog

Then:

1. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

2. Click the Data member.

3. To the right of the Data member, click â–¼

4. Click the point number of the device.

1. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

2. Scroll down and double-click Chz Data .

Where: name slot

X

Chz

Is: name of the chassis:

If: Then the name is: local remote

Local name of the communication module in the chassis, such as a 1756-ENBx or 1756-CNB module.

slot number of the module type of device:

If: Then: input output

I

O channel that the device is wired to

G. Press the Enter key or click another cell.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-12 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

When you finish, the Tags window should look similar to the following:

Tag Name start

Alias For conveyor:1:I.Data.1(C)

Base Tag conveyor:1:I.Data.1(C) start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis (named conveyor).

TIP

Even if the I/O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format, address the required point as described in step F.

Tag Name start

Alias For conveyor:1:I.Data.1(C)

Base Tag conveyor:I.Slot[1].Data.1(C) start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 1 of a remote chassis (named conveyor).

Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format, a structure associated with the communication module in the remote chassis actually transfers the data.

However, the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the structure for the communication module (e.g., ENB, CNB): start

<conveyor:I.Slot[1].Data.1>

42435

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network 8-13

Schedule the ControlNet

Network

If:

No

Yes

A. Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller.

B. Start RSNetworx

for ControlNet software.

C. Has this network been scheduled before?

Then:

1. From the File menu, select New .

2. From the Network menu, select Online .

3. Select your ControlNet network and choose OK .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, type or select the following parameters:

In this box: Specify:

Network Update Time

Max Scheduled Address

Max Unscheduled Address

Media Redundancy repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network greatest node number that you will use on the network channels in use

Network Name name for the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration, then click Save .

11. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

12. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

1. From the File menu, select Open .

2. Select the file for the network and choose Open .

3. From the Network menu, select Online .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, update the following parameters:

In this box:

Max Scheduled Address

Specify: greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network

Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

11. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-14 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network 8-15

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

8-16 Communicate with 1756 I/O over a ControlNet™ Network

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Chapter

9

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a

ControlNet

Network

Use this procedure to monitor and control I/O devices that are wired to 1771 I/O modules when a:

1756-CNB module connects the local chassis to a ControlNet network.

1771-ACN adapter connects the 1771 I/O modules to the same

ControlNet network.

ControlLogix Chassis with

1756-CNB Module

1771-ACN Adapter

42518

ControlNet Network

How to Use This Procedure

TIP

To create and manage tags as you program your logic, use these tips:

To create a tag:

1. Type the name for the tag.

2. Right-click the tag and choose New "tag_name".

To change the name of a tag:

Right-click the tag and choose Edit "tag_name"

Properties.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-2 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary task:

Add the Local 1756-CNB Module

To complete this procedure, do the following tasks:

Add the 1771-ACN Module

Communicate with Block Transfer Modules, using either of these procedures:

Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module

Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer

Modules

Address I/O

Schedule the ControlNet Network

Validate Connections

Stagger the Messages

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Add the Local 1756-CNB

Module

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-3

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

D.

42376

B. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

C. Select your type of CNB and click OK.

E.

F.

D. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_local_cnb ).

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

42377

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-4 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

H.

I.

42398

H. Initially, do you want to the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

I. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-5

Add the 1771-ACN Module

C.

42399

A. Right-click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module.

B. Select the type of 1771-ACN that is in the remote chassis and click OK.

D.

E.

F.

42434

C. Type a name for the module. Use a name that identifies the I/O in the chassis.

D. Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module.

E. Specify the Input Size and Output Size:.

If the chassis uses: Then type or select:

2-slot addressing number of slots in the chassis / 2

Example:

For a 4-slot chassis, specify 2 for the input and output sizes.

1-slot addressing

1/2-slot addressing number of slots in the chassis For a 4-slot chassis, specify 4 for the input and output sizes.

number of slots in the chassis x 2 For a 4-slot chassis, specify 8 for the input and output sizes.

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-6 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

H.

I.

J.

No

42401

H. Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update.

Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5 ms, type a rate of 5, 10, 20 ms, etc.

I. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

J. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

K. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-7

Read or Write Data To or

From a Block Transfer

Module

Use this procedure to transfer data to or from a module that requires block transfers.

Block Transfer Read

1 2

Data from a

BT module

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Buffer of INTs int_buffer_read[0] int_buffer_read[1] int_buffer_read[2]

DINTs for use in the project dints_input[0] dints_input[1] dints_input[2]

1. The MSG instruction reads 16-bit integers (INTs) from the BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs.

2. An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32-bit integers (DINTs).

Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs.

Block Transfer Write

1 2

DINTs from the project dints_output[0] dints_output[1] dints_output[2]

Buffer of INTs int_buffer_write[0] int_buffer_write[1] int_buffer_write[2]

Data for a BT module

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

1. An FAL instruction converts the 32-bit integers (DINTs) from the

Logix5000 controller to 16-bit integers (INTs):

Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs.

The instruction stores the data in a temporary array of INTs.

2. The MSG instruction writes the INTs from the temporary array to

BT module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-8 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Read Data From a Block Transfer Module

1. Enter the following rung:

Reads 16-bit integers (INTs) from the module and stores them in int_buffer_read . (Only include the msg_write.EN

tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer write message to the same module.) msg_read.EN

/ msg_write.EN

/

MSG

Type - Block Transfer Read

Message Control msg_read ...

EN

DN

ER

42463

Tag Name: msg_read msg_write

Description: block transfer read message

Data Type:

MESSAGE block transfer write message to the same module MESSAGE

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-9

2. Enter the following rung:

When msg_read is done, the FAL instruction moves the values in int_buffer_read to dints_input . This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the controller.

msg_read.DN

ints_to_dints

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression ints_to_dints

0

ALL dints_input[ints_to_dints.POS] int_buffer_read[ints_to_dints.POS]

EN

DN

ER

42463

Tag Name: int_buffer_read ints_to_dints

FAL Length dint_inputs

Description: Data Type: array that stores the data from the BT module INT [ length ] converts the 16-bit integers from the BT module to 32-bit integers for the Logix5000 controller number of elements to convert

CONTROL immediate value equal to length array that stores the input data from the module for use by the controller

DINT [ length ]

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Where: length

Is the: number of elements to transfer

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-10 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer Module

1. Enter the following rung:

The application writes configuration and output data to dints_output , which is an array of DINTs. Before the controller sends the data to the module, the FAL instruction moves the values to int_buffer_write . This converts them to 16-bit integers (INTs). (Only include the msg_read.EN

tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer read message to the same module.) msg_read.EN

/ msg_write.EN

/ dints_to_ints

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode dints_to_ints

0

ALL int_buffer_write[dints_to_ints.POS] Dest

Expression dints_output[dints_to_ints.POS]

EN

DN

ER

42463

Tag Name: msg_read msg_write

Description: block transfer read message to the same module block transfer write message

Data Type:

MESSAGE

MESSAGE dints_to_ints

FAL Length converts the 32-bit integers from the Logix5000 controller to 16-bit integers for the BT module number of elements to convert

CONTROL immediate value equal to length int_buffer_write array that stores the data to send to the BT module as 16-bit integers dints_output array that stores the output data that other instructions produce for the module

INT [ length ]

DINT [ length ]

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Where: length

Is the: number of elements to transfer

2. Enter the following rung:

After the FAL instruction converts the DINTs to INTs, the MSG instruction sends the data in int_buffer_write to the module.

dints_to_ints.DN

MSG

Type - Block Transfer Write

Message Control msg_write ...

EN

DN

ER

42463

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-11

Configure the Messages

If you want to: read input data write configuration or output data

For this item:

Path

RIO or ControlNet

Slot

1. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

2. Select a configuration:

For this item:

Message Type

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Type or select:

Block Transfer Read number of INTs to read int_buffer_read [0]

Block Transfer Write int_buffer_write [0] number of INTs to write

3. Click the Communication tab.

Type or select:

Path to the 1771-ACN module:

A. Click Browse…

B. Select the 1771-ACN module that is in the chassis with the block transfer module.

C. Choose OK .

Although your logic will control the path, the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial selection.

ControlNet slot number of the BT module

Although your logic will control this value, the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value (0 - 15).

4. How many devices require block transfer instructions?

If:

16 or less devices more than 16 devices

Then:

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

A. Select 16 devices that require the most frequent updates.

B. Is this message to one of those devices?

If:

Yes

No

Then

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

Clear the Cache Connection check box.

5. Choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-12 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Read or Write Data To or

From Multiple Block

Transfer Modules

Input data from the first BT module

Input data from the next BT module

Data from a

BT module

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Use this procedure to program a single MSG instruction to read data from multiple block transfer modules.

The following diagram shows the flow of data for a block transfer read. The block transfer write sequence works in the opposite order.

1

3

Buffer of INTs

BT_int_buffer_read[0]

BT_int_buffer_read[1]

BT_int_buffer_read[2]

BT_int_buffer_read[0]

BT_int_buffer_read[1]

BT_int_buffer_read[2]

BT_int_buffer_read[3]

BT_int_buffer_read[4]

2

4

DINTs for use in the project

BT_input[0,0]

BT_input[0,1]

BT_input[0,2]

BT_input[0,3]

BT_input[0,4]

BT_input[1,0]

BT_input[1,1]

BT_input[1,2]

BT_input[1,3]

BT_input[1,4]

Input data that is allocated for the first BT module

Input data that is allocated for the next BT module

1. The MSG instruction reads 16-bit integers (INTs) from the first

BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs.

2. An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32-bit integers (DINTs).

Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs.

3. The MSG instruction reads the next module. This procedures lets you vary the number of INTs that you read from each module.

4. The FAL instruction moves the data to the next element of dimension 0 of the DINT array. Each element of this dimension corresponds to a different BT module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-13

To read multiple block transfer modules:

Create a User-Defined Data Type

Create the Array for the Input Data

Send a Block Transfer Read Message

Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module

Convert the INTs to DINTs

Step to the Next BT Module

To write data to multiple block transfer modules, see the logic on

page 9-20.

Create a User-Defined Data Type

Create the following data type. You will use this for the array that stores the message properties for each module.

+

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Trends

Data Types

User-Defined 1. Right-click and select New

Data Type.

2. Assign the following:

Name

Description

Members

Name

REQ_LEN

+

Slot

Path

BT_CONFIGURATION

Configuration properties for a block transfer message to a specific module

Data Type

INT

SINT

STRING

Style

Decimal

Decimal

Description number of elements (INTs) to read or write slot number of the module path to the 1771-ACN module (Use the

Message Path editor to assign the path.)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-14 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Create the Array for the Input Data

Enter the following rung:

The SIZE instruction determines the number of elements in the first dimension (Dim 0) of the BT_input array. Since this dimension contains one element for each BT module, this instruction determines how many modules the MSG instruction must read. A subsequent rung uses this number to determine the end of the sequence of MSGs.

Tag Name: Description:

BT_input data from each BT module

The first dimension represents each module.

The second dimension represents the data from a module.

BT_input_modules number of modules that the MSG instruction must read

Where: number length

43020

Data Type: Scope:

DINT [ number,length ] name_of_controller

(controller)

DINT name_of_controller

(controller)

Is the: number of modules that this message reads maximum number of elements in any of the block transfers

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-15

Send a Block Transfer Read Message

1. Enter the following rung:

The MSG instruction reads the input values from a BT module and stores the values in BTR_int_buffer_read

Each time the instruction is done, it automatically restarts and sends another message.

.

Prior to each message, the series of MOV and COPY instructions load the appropriate configuration properties into the MSG instruction so it can read the next BT module. The configuration properties load from the

After each MSG, a subsequent rung increments the

BTR_cfg array.

BTR_index tag. This loads the configuration properties for the next module into the MSG instruction before it executes again.

Tag Name:

BTR

BTR_cfg

BTR_index

Description: block transfer message that reads data from each BT module array of configuration properties for each BT module controls which BT module that the MSG instruction reads

Where: number

Data Type:

MESSAGE

BT_CONFIGURATION

[ number ]

DINT

43020

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Is the: number of modules that this message reads

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-16 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

2. Configure the message:

On this tab:

Configuration

Communication

For this item:

Message Type

Number Of Elements

Type or select:

Block Transfer Read

1

Although your logic will control this value, the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value.

BTR_int_buffer_read Destination Tag

Path

To create this tag:

A. Click New Tag .

B. Type the name.

C. In the Data type box, type INT[ length ], where length equals the length variable of the BT_input

tag from page 9-14.

D. Choose OK .

Path to the 1771-ACN module:

A. Click Browse…

B. Select the 1771-ACN module with which you want to communicate.

C. Choose OK .

Although your logic will control the path the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial path.

slot number of the BT module Slot

Although your logic will control this value, the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial value.

Cache Connection check box Clear the Cache Connection check box..

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-17

Enter the BTR Properties for Each Module

Properties for the first

BT module

Properties for the next

BT module

42376

1. Double-click Controller Tags.

2. Enter the BTR properties for each BT module.

Tag Name Value

− BTR_cfg

− BTR_cfg[0]

+ BTR_cfg[0].REQ_LEN

number of elements to transfer

+ BTR_cfg[0].Slot

+ BTR_cfg[0].Path

( … )

( … ) slot number of the module (independent of chassis addressing) path to the 1771-ACN module:

A. Right-click and select Go to Message Path Editor .

B. Select the 1771-ACN module.

C. Choose OK .

+ BTR_cfg [1]

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-18 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Convert the INTs to DINTs

Enter the following rung:

After the MSG instruction reads data from a module ( BTR.DN

is on), this rung converts the INT values from the BT module to DINT values for use in the project:

The MOV instruction sets the length of the FAL instruction equal to the number of elements that the MSG reads.

The FAL instruction then loads the values from BTR_int_buffer_read into BT_input . This converts the values to

DINTs for use in the project.

BTR_index determines where in the first dimension of dimension corresponds to a specific BT module.

BT_input to store the values. Each element of this

Tag Name: Description:

BTR_ints_to_dints converts the 16-bit integers from the BT module to 32-bit integers for the Logix5000 project

Data Type:

CONTROL

43021

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-19

Step to the Next BT Module

1. Enter the following rung:

After the MSG instruction reads data from a module and the FAL converts it to DINTs ( BTR_ints_to_dints.DN

is on), the

ADD instruction increments the BTR_index . This lets the MSG instruction read the next module.

43021

2. Enter the following rung:

If the EQU instruction is true, the MSG instruction has read the last BT module. The CLR instruction resets BTR_index to zero. This lets the MSG instruction start the series of reads again, starting with the first module.

43021

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-20 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules

43022

43022

43023

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-21

43023

43023

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-22 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Address I/O To monitor or control an I/O device, assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic:

For step-by-step instructions on how to enter logic and tag names, see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures, publication 1756-PM001.

All the data for I/O modules is at the controller scope. As you assign addresses, click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I/O tags.

Use the following table to select the address of an I/O device:

If the device is: digital analog

Then use this address: name:type.

Data [group].bit

element of the array that stores the data for or from this device

Where: name type group bit

Is: name of the remote I/O adapter, such as the 1771-ACN module

Use the name for the rack that contains the module to which this device is wired.

Use the name from the I/O configuration of the controller.

type of device:

If: input I

Then: output O group number of the module to which this device is wired point (bit) number to which this device is wired

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-23

EXAMPLE

Address a digital device that is wired to a 1771 I/O module

I/O Configuration

[5] 1756-CNB/D Local_CNB

4 17771-ACN Remote_1771 adapter module for rack number 4 input device group 2 bit 0

Remote_1771:I.Data[2].0

42435

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-24 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Schedule the ControlNet

Network

If:

No

Yes

A. Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller.

B. Start RSNetworx

for ControlNet software.

C. Has this network been scheduled before?

Then:

1. From the File menu, select New .

2. From the Network menu, select Online .

3. Select your ControlNet network and choose OK .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, type or select the following parameters:

In this box: Specify:

Network Update Time

Max Scheduled Address

Max Unscheduled Address

Media Redundancy repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network greatest node number that you will use on the network channels in use

Network Name name for the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration, then click Save .

11. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

12. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

1. From the File menu, select Open .

2. Select the file for the network and choose Open .

3. From the Network menu, select Online .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, update the following parameters:

In this box:

Max Scheduled Address

Specify: greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network

Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

11. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-25

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-26 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Stagger the Messages

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network 9-27

As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Program a message to communicate with multiple devices. Refer to Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer

Modules on page 9-12.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

9-28 Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet™ Network

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

When to Use This

Procedure

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a

ControlNet

Network

Chapter

10

Use this procedure to monitor and control I/O devices that are wired to 1794 I/O modules when a:

1756-CNB module connects the local chassis to a ControlNet network.

1794-ACN adapter connects the 1794 I/O modules to the same

ControlNet network.

1

ControlNet network

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary step:

Add the local 1756-CNB module

To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Add the Remote 1794-ACN Module

Add I/O Modules

Create Aliases

Schedule the ControlNet Network

To check your work, do the following step:

Validate Connections

42436

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-2 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

Add the local 1756-CNB module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

D.

42376

B. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

C. Select your type of CNB and click OK.

E.

F.

D. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_local_cnb ).

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

42377

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network 10-3

H.

I.

42398

H. Initially, do you want to the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

I. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-4 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

Add the Remote 1794-ACN

Module

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-CNB/x name_of_local_CNB

A. Right-click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module.

B. Select the type of 1794-ACN that you are using and click OK.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

42433

C. Type a name for the ACN module. Use a name that identifies the

I/O of this adapter.

D. Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module.

E. Type or select the number of I/O modules on this rail.

F. Are most of the modules on this rail digital I/O modules?

If:

Yes

No

Then select

Rack Optimization

None

G. How closely must any module at this location match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

H. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network 10-5

I.

J.

K.

42401

I. In step

F.

, which Comm Format did you select?

If:

Rack Optimization

None

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device on the rail must update.

Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5 ms, type a rate of 5,

10, 20 ms, etc.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

J. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

K. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

L. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-6 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

Add I/O Modules

If: no yes

And it is an: output module input module

In this task, you add I/O modules to the I/O configuration of the controller.

A. Is the module in the I/O configuration of another controller?

And you want to: Then:

Go to the next step.

Go to the next step.

maintain communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

1. Copy the module from the I/O configuration of the other controller.

2. Paste the module into the I/O configuration of this controller.

3. Go to Create Aliases

Go to the next step.

stop communication with the module if it loses communication with the other controller

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-CNB/x name_of_local_CNB

− z 1794-ACN/x name_of_rail Add a 1794 I/O module here.

B. Right-click the 1794-ACN module and select New Module.

C. Select the type of module and click OK.

E.

D.

F.

D. Type a name for the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed.

42420

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

If this module is a: digital input digital input/output digital output analog

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network 10-7

F. Select a Comm Format:

IMPORTANT

If the module is also in the I/O configuration of another controller, then select the Listen Only version of the Comm Format (e.g., Listen Only - Input Data).

And the:

Comm Format of the 1794-ACN is Rack Optimization

And the module must: update at the RPI of the

1794-ACN update faster than the RPI of the

1794-ACN

Then select:

Rack Optimization

Input Data

Input Data Comm Format of the 1794-ACN is None

Comm Format of the 1794-ACN is Rack Optimization

Comm Format of the 1794-ACN is None

Comm Format of the 1794-ACN is Rack Optimization

Comm Format of the 1794-ACN is None update at the RPI of the

1794-ACN update faster than the RPI of the

1794-ACN

Rack Optimization

Data

Data update at the RPI of the

1794-ACN update faster than the RPI of the

1794-ACN

Rack Optimization

Output Data

Output Data

Data

G.

42420

G. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-8 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

H. Click Next.

I.

J.

K.

42401

I. In step

F.

, did you select Rack Optimization as the Comm

Format?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device that is wired to the module must update.

Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5 ms, type a rate of 5,

10, 20 ms, etc.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

J. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network 10-9

K. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

L. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-10 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

Create Aliases In this task, you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I/O points or channels (devices). As an alias for an I/O point or channel, each tag:

• provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point or channel

• represents the value of the point or channel. When one changes, the other reflects the change.

EXAMPLE

Create aliases

The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names, such as start and motor. Later, the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I/O devices.

start is an alias for the push button that is wired to point 1 of the module that is in slot 2 of the rail named conveyor. When the push button is on, start is on.

motor is an alias for the starter contactor that is wired to point 0 of the module that is in slot 1 of the rail named conveyor. When motor turns on, the starter contactor turns on.

stop

<conveyor:2:I.Data.0> start

<conveyor:2:I.Data.1> motor

<conveyor:1:O.Data.0>

A. From the Logic menu, select Edit Tags.

motor

<conveyor:1:O.Data.0>

42435

B.

42421

C.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network 10-11

If the device is: digital analog input analog output

B. Select the scope of the descriptive tag.

C. To the right of the tag name, click the Alias For cell.

The cell displays a â–¼

D. Click the â–¼

E. Click the Controller Scoped Tags button, if it is available. (All the data for I/O modules is at the controller scope.)

F. Select the I/O device that the tag represents:

And it Comm

Format is:

Data (e.g., Input

Data, Output Data)

Then:

Rack Optimization

1. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

2. Click the Data member.

3. To the right of the Data member, click â–¼

4. Click the point number of the device.

1. Click name:slot:X.

2. To the right of the selection, click â–¼

3. Click the point number of the device.

1. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

2. Scroll down and double-click Chz InputData .

1. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

2. Scroll down and double-click Chz OutputData .

Where: name slot

X

Is: name of the 1794-ACN module slot number of the module type of device:

If: Then: input output

I

O channel that the device is wired to Chz

G. Press the Enter key or click another cell.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-12 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

When you finish, the Tags window should look similar to the following:

Tag Name start

Alias For conveyor:2:I.Data.1(C)

Base Tag conveyor:2:I.Data.1(C) start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 2 of the rail named conveyor .

TIP

Even if the I/O module uses the Rack Optimization Comm Format, address the required point as described in step F.

Tag Name start

Alias For conveyor:2:I.1(C)

Base Tag conveyor:I.Data[2].1(C) start is an alias for point 1 of the input module that is in slot 2 of a rail named conveyor .

Because the module uses the Rack Optimization format, a structure associated with the ACN module actually transfers the data.

However, the ladder logic displays the address of the data within the

ACN structure: start

<conveyor:I.Data[2].1>

42435

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network 10-13

Schedule the ControlNet

Network

If:

No

Yes

A. Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller.

B. Start RSNetworx

for ControlNet software.

C. Has this network been scheduled before?

Then:

1. From the File menu, select New .

2. From the Network menu, select Online .

3. Select your ControlNet network and choose OK .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, type or select the following parameters:

In this box: Specify:

Network Update Time

Max Scheduled Address

Max Unscheduled Address

Media Redundancy repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network greatest node number that you will use on the network channels in use

Network Name name for the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration, then click Save .

11. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

12. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

1. From the File menu, select Open .

2. Select the file for the network and choose Open .

3. From the Network menu, select Online .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, update the following parameters:

In this box:

Max Scheduled Address

Specify: greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network

Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number that you will use on the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

11. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-14 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network 10-15

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10-16 Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet

Network

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Chapter

11

Communicate with Another Controller over a

ControlNet

Network

Use this procedure to send a message from one controller to another controller over an ControlNet network:

ControlLogix controller to another Controllogix controller

ControlLogix controller to a FLexLogix

controller

ControlLogix controller to a PLC-5

®

controller

PLC-5 controller to a ControlLogix controller

ControlLogix Controller PLC-5 Controller

ControlNet Network

ControlLogix Controller FlexLogix Controller

42519

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-2 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary steps:

Step 1: Add the 1756-CNB Module

Step 2: Add the Remote 1756-CNB Module

Step 3: Add the 1788-CNC Module

To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Step 4: Add the Other Controller

Step 5: Enter a Message

Step 6: Configure the Message

Step 7: Stagger the Messages

If a PLC-5 controller sends the message, do the following step:

Step 8: Access ControlLogix Data

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step 1: Add the 1756-CNB

Module

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-3

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

D.

42376

B. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

C. Select your type of CNB and click OK.

E.

F.

D. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_local_cnb ).

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

42377

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-4 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

H.

I.

42398

H. Initially, do you want to the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

I. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step 2: Add the Remote

1756-CNB Module

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-5

Determine if you must complete this step:

If the other controller is a:

ControlLogix controller

FlexLogix controller

PLC-5C controller

Then:

Complete this step.

Go to Step 3: Add the 1788-CNC Module

Go to Step 4: Add the Other Controller

C.

F.

42399

A. Right-click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module.

B. Select the type of CNB that is in the remote chassis and click OK.

H.

42404

C. Type a name for the CNB module. Use a name that identifies the

I/O in the chassis.

D. Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module.

E. Type or select the number of slots in the remote chassis.

F. Are most of the modules in the chassis non-diagnostic, digital

I/O modules?

If:

Yes

No

Then select

Rack Optimization

None

G. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

D.

E.

G.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-6 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

H. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

I. Click Next.

J.

K.

L.

J. In step

F.

, which Comm Format did you select?

If:

Rack Optimization

None

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update.

Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5 ms, type a rate of 5,

10, 20 ms, etc.

No RPI is required. Go to the next step.

42401

K. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-7

L. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

M. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-8 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

Step 3: Add the 1788-CNC

Module

Determine if you must complete this step:

If you are sending a message to a:

FlexLogix controller

ControlLogix controller

PLC-5C controller

Then:

Complete this step.

Go to Step 4: Add the Other Controller

C.

42399

A. Right-click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module.

B. Select the type of 1788-CNC module (communication card) that is in the FlexLogix controller and click OK.

D.

G.

H.

C. Type a name for the module.

D. Type or select the ControlNet node number of the module.

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed (1 or 2).

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

42427

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-9

K.

L.

H. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

I. If communication with the modules fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a modules fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

42398

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-10 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

Step 4: Add the Other

Controller

Add a PLC-5C controller

Add a FlexLogix controller

Add a ControlLogix controller

42428

A. What type of controller receives the message?

If it is a:

PLC-5C

FlexLogix controller

ControlLogix controller

Then: right-click the local 1756-CNB module and select

New Module .

right-click the 1788-CNC module and select

New Module .

right-click remote 1756-CNB module and select

New Module .

B. Select the type of controller and click OK.

D.

D.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

F.

42377

C. Type the name of the controller.

D. Type or select the location of the controller:

If:

PLC-5C controller

FlexLogix controller

ControlLogix controller

Type or select:

ControlNet node number of the controller always 0 slot number of the controller

E. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab (does not apply to a FlexLogix controller)?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-11

F. Click Next.

H.

I.

G. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

42398

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

To make it easier to test a system one module or section at a time:

1. Initially, inhibit all the modules.

2. To test a section of the system, clear the check boxes for the modules of that section

(i.e., uninhibit the modules).

H. If communication fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a modules fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

I. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-12 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

Step 5: Enter a Message e e e e e e condition ?

/ e e e e e condition ?

/

A. Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction (s).

Message

Message Control

MSG

? ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

B. In the MSG instruction, type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key.

C. In the MSG instruction, right-click the message control tag and select New tag_name. (In older revisions of the software, the menu option is Create tag_name.

)

D. From the Scope list, select name_of_controller (controller), and click OK.

E.

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

E. Enter message.

EN.

where: message is the message control tag from step B.

F. If your message is to a PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

controller and it reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-13

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE condition

Read integers from a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos]

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE e condition

Write integers to a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller.

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression fal_control

?

0 all int_buffer[fal_control.pos] dint_array[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42424

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-14 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

Step 6: Configure the

Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. Select a configuration for the message:

Table 11.A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller

If you want to: read (receive) the data write (send) the data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

CIP Data Table Read first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

CIP Data Table Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer first element of the tag for the data in the other controller

Table 11.B Message to a PLC-5 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data write (send) data floating-point (REAL) read (receive) data write (send) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

PLC5 Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10)

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-15

If the message is to a:

PLC-5 controller

Logix5000 controller:

ControlLogix controller

FlexLogix controller

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. Click Browse …

E. Select that controller that receives the message and click OK.

F. Complete the communication parameters:

Then:

1. Leave the CIP button selected.

2. Disregard the Cache Connection check box.

How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send messages to?

If: Then:

16 or less Logix5000 controllers

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

more than 16

Logix5000 controllers

1. Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the most frequent messages.

2. Is this message to one of those controllers?

If:

Yes

No

Then

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

Clear the Cache Connection check box.

G. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-16 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

Step 7: Stagger the

Messages

As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Step 8: Access

ControlLogix Data

Complete this step for any message that a PLC-5C controller sends to a

ControlLogix controller over an ControlNet network.

IMPORTANT This procedure uses RSLogix 5

software, revision 3.x.

For this section:

This PLC-5

Target Device

A. Using RSLogix 5 software, open the project for the PLC-5 controller.

B. Display the set-up screen for the message.

C. Specify the following parameters:

And this item:

Communication Command

Data Table Address

Size in Elements

Port Number

Data Table Address

MultiHop

Specify:

PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5 Typed Write starting address of the data in the PLC-5 controller number of elements to read or write

2

Type, in quotation marks [“ “], the name of the tag in the

ControlLogix controller (e.g., “count”).

Yes .

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network 11-17

D. Click the MultiHop tab.

E.

F.

42426

E. Type the ControlNet node number of the 1756-CNB module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller.

F. Type the slot number of the ControlLogix controller.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

11-18 Communicate with Another Controller over a ControlNet

Network

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Route PLC-5

®

Messages Between

ControlNet

Networks

Chapter

12

You can use ControlLogix communication modules to route a message between PLC-5 controllers that are on different networks (i.e., a remote message)

The following example depicts a ControlLogix chassis with two

1756-CNB modules that route a message from a ControlNet network to a different ControlNet network.

EXAMPLE

Message from a PLC-5C on a ControlNet network to a PLC-5C on a different ControlNet network

C

N

B

C

N

B

P

L

C

5

C node 2

ControlNet network A node 3 node 5

ControlNet network B

Message

P

L

C

5

C

node 1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

12-2 Route PLC-5

®

Messages Between ControlNet

Networks

Route a ControlNet

Message

To send a message from a PLC-5C controller to a PLC-5C controller on a different ControlNet network:

IMPORTANT This procedure uses RSLogix 5

software, revision

3.x.

For this section:

This PLC-5

Target Device

A. Using RSLogix 5 software, open the project for the PLC-5 controller that sends the message.

B. Display the set-up screen for the message.

C. Specify the following parameters:

And this item:

Communication Command

Data Table Address

Size in Elements

Port Number

Data Table Address

MultiHop

Specify:

PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5 Typed Write starting address of the data in this PLC-5 controller number of elements to read or write

2 starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message

Yes .

D. Click the MultiHop tab.

E.

F.

42426

E. Type the ControlNet node number of the 1756-CNB module that is on the same ControlNet network as the controller that sends the message.

F. Type the slot number of the 1756-CNB module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

H.

Route PLC-5

®

Messages Between ControlNet

Networks 12-3

G. Press the Insert key.

42464

I.

H. Select 1756-CNB.

I. Type the ControlNet node number of the controller that receives the message.

The following example depicts the MultiHop entries for the

example on page 12-1.

EXAMPLE

MultiHop entries

3 1 1 where: indicates the:

3

1

1 node number of the 1756-CNB module on ControlNet network A slot number of the 1756-CNB module on ControlNet network B node number of the PLC-5C controller that is receiving the message

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

12-4 Route PLC-5

®

Messages Between ControlNet

Networks

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Chapter

13

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal

Over a ControlNet

Network

Use this procedure to exchange data between a PanelView terminal and a ControlLogix controller over a ControlNet network.

42521

ControlNet Network

IMPORTANT

Before you use this procedure, your system must meet these requirements:

Each 1756-CNB module communicates with no more than three PanelView terminals.

Each PanelView terminal communicates scheduled data with only one controller

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-2 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary task:

Add the Local 1756-CNB Module

To complete this procedure, do the following tasks:

Add the PanelView Terminal

Organize Your Scheduled Data

Organize Your Unscheduled Data

Configure the PanelView Terminal

Create PanelView Tags

Schedule the ControlNet Network

To check your work, do the following task:

Validate Connections

Add the Local 1756-CNB

Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42376

B. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

C. Select your type of CNB and click OK.

D.

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-3

E.

F.

42377

D. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_local_cnb ).

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-4 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

H.

I.

42398

H. Initially, do you want to the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

I. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Add the PanelView

Terminal

C.

E.

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-5

42399

A. Right-click name_of_local_cnb and select New Module.

B. Select PanelView and click OK.

D.

F.

If: up to 8 more than 8

42400

C. Type a name for the PanelView terminal.

D. Type or select the ControlNet node number of the terminal.

E. Does the terminal read more than 8 words of scheduled data

(16-bit integers) or write more than 8 words of scheduled data?

Then select

Data - 8 INT

Data - 32 INT

EXAMPLE

Select a Comm Format

If the PanelView terminal writes:

45 time-critical bits (45

÷

16 = 3 integers)

4 time-critical integers

Then the terminal writes 7 time-critical integers, so select Data - 8 INT.

F. How closely must the PanelView terminal match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-6 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

G. Click Next.

H.

I.

J.

42401

H. Type the rate that you want scheduled data to transfer with the

PanelView terminal.

Use a power of two time the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5ms, type a rate of 10, 20ms, etc.

I. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

J. If communication with the modules fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

Then: Notes: If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

K. Click Finish.

Your controller organizer should look similar to the following:

42402

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-7

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-8 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

Organize Your Scheduled

Data

To transfer time-critical data, use the scheduled communications between the controller and the PanelView terminal:

If data type of the tag is:

And it is: And the:

PanelView writes the data part of a structure or array

PanelView reads the data

BOOL

PanelView writes the data not part of a structure or array

PanelView reads the data

DINT

PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data

Then:

Copy name_of_panelview:I.Data[x].y to the tag.

Copy the tag to name_of_panelview:O.Data[x].y

Convert the tag to an alias for name_of_panelview:I.Data[x].y

Convert the tag to an alias for name_of_panelview:O.Data[x].y

Move name_of_panelview:I.Data[z] to the tag.

Move the tag to name_of_panelview:O.Data[z]

Where: Is: name_of_panelview name of the PanelView terminal in the I/O configuration of the controller x y element of the PanelView terminal input (I) or output (O) structure. You can use this element for up to 16 bits.

bit number 0 to 15 within the input or output element z unique element of the PanelView terminal input (I) or output (O) structure

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-9

EXAMPLE

Organize scheduled (i.e., time-critical) data

Copies the value of name_of_panelview:I.Data[0].1 to station_1_stop.

name_of_panelview:I.Data[0].1

station_1.stop

Copies the value of station_1_run to name_of_panelview:O.Data[0].0.

station_1.run

name_of_panelview:O.Data[0].0

alarm_ack and alarm are aliases for data that the PanelView terminal writes and reads alarm_ack

<name_of_panelview:I.Data[0].2> alarm

<name_of_panelview:O.Data[0].1>

U

Moves name_of_panelview:I.Data[3] to counter.PRE (a DINT tag) and moves counter.ACC (a DINT tag) to name_of_panelview:O.Data[3]

MOV

Move

Source name_of_panelview:I.Data[3]

0

Dest counter.PRE

0

MOV

Move

Source counter.ACC

0

Dest name_of_panelview:O.Data[3]

0

42403

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-10 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

Organize Your Unscheduled

Data

To transfer unscheduled data with the PanelView terminal, organize the tags in the ControlLogix controller as follows:

Then: If data type of the tag is:

And it is: And the:

PanelView writes the data part of a structure or array

(including an I/O device)

PanelView reads the data

BOOL

DINT

DINT not part of a structure or array

32767 PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data

> 32767 PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data a. Create a tag of the DINT data type.

b. Copy bit z of the DINT tag to the BOOL tag.

a. Create a tag of the DINT data type.

b. Copy the BOOL tag to bit z of the DINT tag.

a. Create a tag of the DINT data type.

b. Convert the BOOL tag to an alias for bit z of the DINT tag.

a. Create a tag of the INT data type.

b. Move the INT tag to the DINT tag.

a. Create a tag of the INT data type.

b. Move the DINT tag to the INT tag.

a. Create a tag of the REAL data type.

b. Move the REAL tag to the DINT tag.

a. Create a tag of the REAL data type.

b. Move the DINT tag to the REAL tag.

where: z is bit 0 to 15 of the DINT tag.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-11

EXAMPLE

Organize unscheduled (i.e., not time-critical) data

Copies the value of bit 3 of station_1_status (DINT tag) to station_1.start (a member of the station_1 structure) station_1_status.3

station_1.start

Copies the value of counter.DN to bit 1 of station_1_status (DINT tag) counter.DN

RUN_mode is an alias for bit 4 of station_1_status.(DINT tag) station_1_status.1

RUN_mode

<station_1_status.4>

Moves pv_write_1 (an integer that the PanelView writes) to shift_entry (DINT tag) and moves shift_display (DINT tag) to pv_read_1 (an integer that the PanelView reads).

MOV

Move

Source pv_write_1

0.0

Dest shift_entry

0

MOV

Move

Source shift_display

0

Dest pv_read_1

0.0

42403

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-12 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

Configure the PanelView

Terminal

A. Start PanelBuilder32 software.

B. Open an existing PanelBuilder application or create a new application.

C. From the Application menu, select Settings.

D. Click the Comms Setup button.

E.

42395

E. Type the ConrolNet node number of the PanelView terminal.

F. Under Node Name, right-click End of Node List and select Insert

Node.

G.

42396

G. Select ControlLogix5000.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-13

H.

42396

I.

H. Type a name for the ControlLogix controller.

I. Type the path to the ControlLogix controller. Use the following format: space cnb_address 1 controller_slot where: cnb_address is:

ControlNet node number of the 1756-CNB module that is in the same chassis as the

ControlLogix controller slot number of the ControlLogix controller controller_slot

J. Click OK.

K. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-14 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

Create PanelView Tags A. On the PanelView screen, create the required object.

B. Double-click the object.

C. Click the Edit Tag button.

D.

F.

E.

G.

42397

D. Type a name for the object

E. Select a data type that matches the data type of the tag in the

ControlLogix controller.

F. In the ControlLogix controller is the data scheduled or unscheduled?

If: scheduled unscheduled

Then:

Click the Scheduled button.

1. Click the Unscheduled button.

2. From the Node Name list, select the controller.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

If the tag is: scheduled unscheduled

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-15

G. Specify the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller:

Specify: And its data type is: bit

And the:

INT

PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data

PanelView writes the data

PanelView reads the data bit

INT

REAL

SI0: x/y

SO0: x/y

SI0: x

SO0: x tag_name.z

name of INT or REAL tag that stores the data in the

ControlLogix controller

Where: x

Is: element of the PanelView input or output structure in the controller y z bit number 0 to 15 within the input or output element tag_name name of the tag that you created in the controller to exchange bits with the PanelView terminal bit number 0 to 15

EXAMPLE

Specify the address of a tag in the ControlLogix controller

ControlLogix Controller: name_of_panelview:I.Data[0].1

name_of_panelview:O.Data[3] station_1_status.3

pv_write_1

PanelView Application:

SI0:0.1

SO0:3 station_1_status.3

pv_write_1

H. Click OK.

I. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-16 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

Schedule the ControlNet

Network

If:

No

Yes

A. Download the RSLogix 5000 project to the controller.

B. Download the PanelBuilder32 application to the terminal.

C. Start RSNetworx

for ControlNet software.

D. Has this network been scheduled before?

Then:

1. From the File menu, select New .

2. From the Network menu, select Online .

3. Select your ControlNet network and choose OK .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, type or select the following parameters:

In this box:

Network Update Time

Max Scheduled Address

Max Unscheduled Address

Media Redundancy

Network Name

Specify: repetitive time interval in which data is sent over the ControlNet network greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network greatest node number that you will use on the network channels in use name for the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Type a name for the file that stores the network configuration, then click Save .

11. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

12. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

1. From the File menu, select Open .

2. Select the file for the network and choose Open .

3. From the Network menu, select Online .

4. Select the Edits Enabled check box.

5. From the Network menu, select Properties .

6. From the Network Parameters tab, update the following parameters:

In this box: Specify:

Max Scheduled Address

Max Unscheduled Address greatest node number to use scheduled communications on the network greatest node number that you will use on the network

7. Click OK .

8. From the Network menu, select Single Pass Browse .

9. From the File menu, select Save .

10. Select the Optimize and re-write Schedule for all Connections button (default) and click OK .

11. In RSLogix 5000 software, save the online project.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network 13-17

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13-18 Communicate with a PanelView

Terminal Over a ControlNet

Network

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

14

Communicate with an RSView Project over a

ControlNet

Network

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure to communicate with tags in either of the following types of RSView projects:

RSView32 project.

RSView Machine Edition project (developed with RSView Studio software)

RSView32 or RSView eface

ControlLogix Chassis with 1756-CNB Module

ControlNet Network

How to Use This Procedure To communicate with an RSView project, you have two options:

If the data: needs regular delivery at a rate that you specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in your application

Then use a: polled message unsolicited message

42520

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-2 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Configure a ControlNet

Driver

A. Start RSLinx

software.

B. From the Communications menu, select Configure Drivers.

C. From the Available Driver Types list, select the type of

ControlNet communication card.

D. Click Add New.

E. Assign a name to the driver, if desired.

F. Supply the required information about the communication card.

Configure a 1784-KTC(X) card

EXAMPLE

ControlNet node number for the workstation

Unused interrupt number

Memory address from the

DIP switch on the

1784-KTC(X) card 42465

I/O base memory address from the DIP switches on the 1784-KTC(X) card

G. Click OK.

H. Click Close.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-3

Select a Communication

Method

Select a method for transferring the data:

If the data: needs regular delivery at a rate that you specify is sent when a specific condition occurs in your application

Then go to:

"Create a Polled Topic" on page 14-4

"Create a Unsolicited Topic" on page 14-14

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-4 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Create a Polled Topic

TIP

RSLogix 5000 software, revision 10.0 or later, automatically creates DDE/OPC topics in RSLinx software whenever you:

• create a project

• save a project

• change the revision of a project to 10.0 or later

In some cases, you have to update the data source for the topic in RSLinx software, as shown in

steps E - G of this section.

A. Display RSLinx software.

B. From the DDE/OPC menu, select Topic Configuration …

C. In the bottom left corner of the window, click New.

D. Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key.

To expand a network one level, do one of the following:

Double-click the network.

Select the network and press the

key.

Click the + sign.

Data Source

Workstation

+

AB_KTC-x, ControlNet

E. On the Data Source tab, expand the ControlNet driver (e.g.,

AB_KTC-1) until you see the ControlLogix controller.

Data Source

Workstation

AB_KTC-x, ControlNet

− xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, 1756-CNB

Backplane, 1756-Ax

+ xx, 1756-Lx

F. Select the ControlLogix controller.

G. Choose Apply and confirm the update.

H. Click the Data Collection tab.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

J. Click the Use

Symbols check box.

43083

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-5

42429

I. Type the update rate (ms) for the data.

L.

K.

K. Select RSLogix 5000 (*acd).

L. Select the RSLogix 5000 project for this topic.

M. Choose Open.

N. Choose Done and then Yes.

43083

M.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-6 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Create a Polled Node A. Open the RSView project.

B.

43081

B. Double-click Node.

C.

D.

C. Click OPC Server.

D. Type a name for the node.

G. Click Accept.

H. Click Close.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

43082

E.

42430

Import Logix5000 Tags

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-7

To import tags from an RSLogix 5000 project into your RSView project, use the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility:

Create an .L5K File

Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility

Use the Utility to Create a .CSV File

Import the .CSV File

Create an .L5K File

A. Open the RSLogix 5000 project that contains the tags that you want to access.

B. From the File menu, choose Save As.

C.

C. Select RSLogix 5000 Import/Export File (*.L5K).

D. Choose Save.

43070

D.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-8 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Install the Logix 5000 Tag Import Utility

A. Get your RSLogix 5000 software CD.

B. On the CD, find the following file: language \Tools\Tag Import

Utility\Logix+5000+Tag+Import.msi.

where: language is the language of your software. For example, for software that is in English, open the Enu folder.

C. Copy the file to your computer.

D. To install the utility, open the file.

Use the Utility to Create a .CSV File

A. Start the Logix 5000 Tag Import utility.

B.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C.

D.

E.

F.

B. Type the name of the node from "Create a Polled Node."

C. Select the .L5K file.

D. Choose Search.

43071

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-9

E. Select the tags to import.

F. Type the name of the topic from "Create a Polled Topic."

G. Choose OK.

H. Choose Save.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-10 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Import the .CSV File

A. Start the Database Import & Export wizard:

Start

Programs

Rockwell Software

RSView Studio

Tools

Database Import & Export Wizard

Start

Programs

Rockwell Software

RSView32 Tools

Database Import & Export Wizard

B. Complete the screens of the wizard:

Import RSView CSV files or

Import RSView Studio CSV files

Next >

CSV file

Next > your option

Next >

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-11

RSView project

Next >

Finish

All correct?

Correct?

OK

43072

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-12 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Create a Polled Tag To create RSView tags one tag at a time:

A.

43081

A. Double-click Tag Database.

B. Click New.

43082

C.

C. Specify the properties of the tag.

D.

E.

G.

42431

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

42432

D. Click Device.

F. Select the name of the node that you created in “Create a Polled

Node” and click OK.

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-13

+

(Node: <Local> )

H. Click the + sign.

(Node: <Local> )

+

+ topic_1 topic_2

I. Next to the topic from “Create a Polled Topic,” click the + sign.

tags in the offline RSLogix 5000 project tags in the ControlLogix controller

(Node: <Local> )

+

− topic_1 topic_2

+

+

Offline

Online

J. Next to Offline, click the + sign.

controller scope tags

(Node: <Local> )

+

− topic_1 topic_2

Offline arrays and structures at the controller scope array_1 counter_1 program scope tags

+

Program:MainProgram

+

Online

K. On the left, select the entry that contains the required tag

(address).

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-14 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

controller scope tags

(Node: <Local> )

+

− topic_1 topic_2

Offline arrays and structures at the controller scope array_1 counter_1 program scope tags

+

Program:MainProgram

+

Online bool_1 dint_1 real_1 single element tags

(BOOLs,

DINTs,

REALs, etc.)

L. On the right, double-click the tag that contains the required data

(i.e., the address for the RSView tag).

M. Click Accept.

N. If this is an RSView32 project, go to Validate an RSView32 Tag.

Create a Unsolicited Topic A. Display RSLinx software.

B. From the Communications menu, select Configure Client

Applications.

C. Click the Virtual Link ID tab.

D. Do you want to use the same Virtual Link ID for each workstation in your system? (Node or IP addresses are sufficient to distinguish between workstations.)

If:

Yes

No

Then:

1. Record the Virtual Link ID number, which you will use in subsequent steps.

2. Click OK .

1. Enter a unique Virtual Link ID for the workstation.

2. Click OK .

3. Close the RSLinx software. (If you configured RSLinx software to start as a service, you must also stop the service.)

4. Re-open the RSLinx software.

E. From the DDE/OPC menu, select Topic Configuration …

F. In the bottom left corner of the window, click New.

G. Type a name for the topic and press the Enter key.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-15

H. Click the Data Collection tab.

I. Specify the following parameters:

For this item:

Processor Type

Data Collection Mode

Do this:

Select PLC-5 .

1. Clear the Polled Messages check box.

2. Select the Unsolicited Messages check box.

J. Click the Advanced Communication tab.

K. Specify the following parameters:

For this item:

Communication Driver

Station

Local or Remote Addressing

Type or select: driver for the network across which you will send the message slot number of the controller that is sending the message

Remote

L. In the Remote Routing Configuration dialog box, specify the following parameters:

For this parameter:

Bridge Device

Local ID

Local KA5

Remote ID

Type or select:

1785-KA5 Bridge/5130-KA

Virtual Link ID from Step D.

arbitrary number between 1 and 107 (RSLinx requires an entry but this configuration does not use the entry.) number that designates the backplane of the

ControlLogix chassis (Use a different number for each backplane.)

M. Click OK.

N. Click Done and confirm the update of the topic.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-16 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Add the 1756-CNB Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

D.

42376

B. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

C. Select your type of CNB and click OK.

E.

F.

D. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_local_cnb ).

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

42377

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-17

H.

I.

42398

H. Initially, do you want to the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

I. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-18 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Enter a Message e e e e e e condition ?

/ e e e e e condition ?

/

A. Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction (s).

Message

Message Control

MSG

? ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

B. In the MSG instruction, type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key.

C. In the MSG instruction, right-click the message control tag and select New tag_name. (In older revisions of the software, the menu option is Create tag_name.

)

D. From the Scope list, select name_of_controller (controller), and click OK.

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

E. Enter message.

EN.

where: message

is the message control tag from step B.

F. If your message reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

In this procedure, you use a PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5

Typed Write message, which requires 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-19

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE condition

Read integers from an RSView project

When condition turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos]

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE e condition

Write integers to an RSView project

When condition turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the

RSView project.

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression fal_control

?

0 all int_buffer[fal_control.pos] dint_array[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42424

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-20 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Configure the Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. On the Configuration tab, specify the following parameters:

Table 14.1 Message to a RSView project

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data floating-point (REAL) write (send) data read (receive) data write (send) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

PLC5 Typed Read logical address, such as N7:0 number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

PLC5 Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer logical address, such as N7:0

PLC5 Typed Read logical address, such as F8:0 number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer logical address, such as F8:0

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. Click Browse …

E. Select the 1756-CNB module and click OK.

F. In the Path text box, add:

, 2, address, 1, 0 where: address is the ControlNet node number of the workstation.

EXAMPLE

Complete path entry washer_chassis, 2, 5, 1, 0

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-21

G. On the Communication tab, specify the following parameters:

For this item:

Communication Method

Source Link

Destination Link

Destination Node

Type or select:

CIP With Source ID

Remote ID from “Create a Unsolicited Topic,

step L.”

Virtual Link ID from “Create a Unsolicited Topic, step D.”

77 (RSLinx reserves node 77 for DDE topics.)

H. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-22 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

Create an Unsolicited Node A. Open the RSView project.

D.

B.

43081

B. Double-click Node.

C.

43082

E.

42430

C. Click OPC Server.

D. Type a name for the node.

G. In the Access Path box, type the name of the topic from “Create a Unsolicited Topic.”

H. Click Accept.

I. Click Close.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network 14-23

Create an Unsolicited Tag

A.

43081

A. Double-click Tag Database.

B. Click New.

43082

C.

42431

C. Specify the properties of the tag.

D.

E.

G.

D. Click Device.

F. Select the name of the node that you created in “Create an

Unsolicited Node” and click OK.

42432

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

14-24 Communicate with an RSView Project over a ControlNet™ Network

G. Type the address for the tag:

If the controller: writes the value reads the value

Then type the: destination address that you specified in the MSG instruction source address that you specified in the MSG instruction

H. Click Accept.

Validate an RSView32 Tag This procedure applies only to RSView32 projects.

A. On the Edit Mode tab, double-click Tag Monitor.

Tag Name Value State

B. Type the name of the RSView tag and press the Enter key.

Tag Name tag_name

Value State

C. What does the State column display?

If: valid error

Then:

The tag contains a valid value from the controller.

There is a communication problem, such as the:

• controller is not available

• server is not running

If a MSG instruction reads or writes the value, you will see error until the controller sends the message for the first time.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When To Use This

Procedure

Chapter

15

Monitor Connections

Use this procedure to alert the system to the loss of communication with a device (module) in the I/O configuration of the controller. For example:

• failure of a module

• loss of power to a chassis

• failure of a communication module

• break in a cable

If the controller losses communication with a module:

Data from that device does not update.

The logic makes decisions on data that may or may not be correct.

EXAMPLE

Loss of communication

Controller B requires data from controller A. If communication fails between the controllers, then controller B continues to act on the last data that it received from controller A.

A communication failure

B

41031

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

15-2 Monitor Connections

Monitor a Connection If communication with a device in the I/O configuration of the controller does not occur for 100 ms, the communication times out and the controller produces the following warnings:

The I/O LED on the front of the controller flashes green.

A

!

shows over the I/O configuration folder and over the device (s) that has timed out.

A module fault code is produced, which you can access through:

Module Properties dialog box for the module

GSV instruction

How do you want to handle the loss of communication with a module in the I/O configuration of the controller?

If you want to: determine if communication has timed out with any device

Then:

Enter the following rung and add the specific action to occur:

If communication times out with at least one device (module) in the I/O configuration of the controller, the I/O LED on the front of the controller flashes green.

The GSV instruction gets the status of the I/O LED and stores it in the I_O_LED tag.

If I_O_LED equal 2, the controller has lost communication with at least one device.

Dest

GSV

Get System Value

CIP Object Class MODULE

CIP Object Name

Attribute Name LedStatus

I_O_LED

EQU

Equal

Source A I_O_LED

Source B 2

42468 where:

I_O_LED is a DINT tag that stores the status of the I/O LED on the front of the controller.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Monitor Connections 15-3

If you want to: determine if communication has timed out with a specific device

Then:

Enter the following rung for the device and add the specific action to occur:

If communication times out with a device (module) in the I/O configuration of the controller, the controller produces a fault code for the module.

The GSV instruction gets the fault code for module_name and stores it in the module_name_fault tag.

If module_name_fault is not equal to 0, then the controller is not communicating with the module.

GSV

Get System Value

CIP Object Class MODULE

CIP Object Name module_name

Attribute Name

Dest

FaultCode module_name_fault

Not Equal

Source A module_name_fault

NEQ

Source B 0

42468 interrupt the execution of logic and execute the Controller Fault Handler

Where: module_name module_name_fault

Is a: name of the module from the I/O configuration

DINT tag that stores the fault code for the module

A. In the controller organizer, right-click the module and select Properties .

B. Click the Connection tab.

C. Select (check) the Major Fault If Connection Fails While in Run Mode check box.

D. Develop a routine for the Controller Fault Handler. See the Logix5000 Controllers

Common Procedures , publication 1756-PM001.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

15-4 Monitor Connections

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Chapter

16

Communicate with a DeviceNet Device

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure to monitor and control I/O devices that are part of a DeviceNet network. Before you use this procedure, set up the

DeviceNet network:

Connect the devices to the network.

In RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software, complete these actions:

Assign a node address to each device.

Configure each device.

Add the devices to the scan list of the 1756-DNB module.

How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Step 1: Add the 1756-DNB Module

Step 2: Create Aliases

Step 3: Set the Scanner to Run Mode

Step 1: Add the 1756-DNB

Module

A. Open the RSLogix 5000 project.

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-CNB/x name_of_local_CNB

Add a local 1756-DNB module here.

z [x] 1756-CNB/x name_of_remote_CNB Add a remote 1756-DNB module here.

B. Where is the 1756-DNB module located?

If it is in: Then: same chassis as controller right-click I/O Configuration and select New

Module .

remote chassis right-click the remote 1756-CNB module and select

New Module .

C. Select 1756-DNB and click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

16-2 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device

D.

H.

42469

D. Type a name for the module. Use a name that identifies the I/O of the network.

E. Type or select the slot number of the module.

F. Type or select the number of input words that are mapped in the scanner plus 1.

For example, if inputs are mapped from word 0 to word 4 (5 words), enter a value of 6 (5 input words + 1 = 6).

G. Type or select the number of output words that are mapped in the scanner plus 1.

H. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

I. Click Next.

J.

E.

F.

G.

K.

L.

42401

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16-3

J. Is the module in a remote chassis?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Type the rate at which the fastest device in the chassis must update.

Use a power of two times the ControlNet NUT.

For example, if the NUT is 5 ms, type a rate of 5, 10, 20 ms, etc.

Leave the RPI at the default setting.

K. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

L. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

M. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

16-4 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device

Step 2: Create Aliases In this step, you convert tags in your programs to aliases for I/O points (devices). As an alias for an I/O point, each tag:

• provides a descriptive name for the device that is wired to the point

• represents the value of the point. When one changes, the other reflects the change.

EXAMPLE

Create aliases

The following logic was initially programmed using descriptive tag names, such as start and motor. Later, the tags were converted to aliases for the corresponding I/O devices.

start is an alias for the push button at bit 1 of word 0 of the module

(1756-DNB) in slot 5 of the local chassis. When the push button is on, start is on.

motor is an alias for the starter contactor at bit 0 of word 0 of the module (1756-DNB) in slot 5 of the local chassis. When motor turns on, the starter contactor turns on.

stop

<Local:5:I.Data[0].0> start

<Local:5:I.Data[0].1> motor

<Local:5:O.Data[0].0>

A. From the Logic menu, select Edit Tags.

motor

<Local:5:O.Data[0].0>

42435

B.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C.

B. Select the scope of the descriptive tag.

C. To the right of the tag name, click the Alias For cell.

The cell displays a â–¼

42421

Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16-5

D. Click the â–¼

E. Click the Controller Scoped Tags button, if it is available. (All the data for I/O modules is at the controller scope.)

F. Next to name:slot:X, click the + sign.

Where: name slot

X

Is: name of the chassis:

If: local

Then the name is:

Local remote name of the 1756-CNB module in the chassis slot number of the module type of device:

If: Then: input output

I

O

G. Next to name:slot:X.

Data, click the + sign.

H. Click name:slot:X.

Data [y].

where: y is the group number that the device is wired to.

I. To the right of the selection, click â–¼

J. Click the bit number of the device.

K. Press the Enter key or click another cell.

When you finish, the Tags window should look similar to this:

Tag Name start

Alias For

Local:5:I.Data[0].1(C)

Base Tag

Local:5:I.Data[0].1(C) start is an alias for bit 1 of word 0 of slot 5 in the local chassis.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

16-6 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device

Step 3: Set the Scanner to

Run Mode

42376

A. Double-click Controller Tags.

Tag Name

+ name:slot:O

Value

( . . . )

B. Next to name:slot : 0, click the + sign.

Where: name slot

Is: name of the chassis:

If: Then the name is: local Local remote name of the 1756-CNB module in the chassis slot number of the module

Tag Name

− name:slot:O

+ name:slot:O.CommandRegister

Value

( . . . )

( . . . )

C. Next to name:slot : 0.CommandRegister, click the + sign.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with a DeviceNet Device 16-7

Tag Name

− name:slot:O

− name:slot:O.CommandRegister

name:slot:O.CommandRegister.Run

Value

( . . . )

( . . . )

0

D. In name:slot : 0.CommandRegister, enter a 1.

Tag Name

− name:slot:O

− name:slot:O.CommandRegister

name:slot:O.CommandRegister.Run

Value

( . . . )

( . . . )

1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

16-8 Communicate with a DeviceNet Device

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Chapter

17

Communicate with Another Controller Over a

DH+

Network

Use this procedure to send a message over a DH+ network between:

ControlLogix controllers

ControlLogix controller and a PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

controller

ControlLogix Controller PLC-5 Controller

DH+ Network

ControlLogix Controller SLC 500 Controller

42470

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-2 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary steps:

Configure Routing Tables

Configure a 1756-DHRIO Channel

To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Add a 1756-DHRIO Module

Enter a Message

Configure the Message

Stagger the Messages

If a PLC-5 or an SLC 5/05 controller sends the message, do the following step:

Access ControlLogix Data

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-3

Configure Routing Tables Determine if you must complete this task:

If a:

PLC-5 controller

SLC 500 controller

ControlLogix controller

Sends a message to a:

ControlLogix controller

PLC-5 controller

SLC 500 controller

ControlLogix controller

Over a: local network remote network local network remote network

And there is: only one ControlLogix controller in the chassis more than one ControlLogix controller in the chassis

Then:

Go to “Configure a 1756-DHRIO

Channel” on page 17-8.

Complete this task.

Complete this task.

Go to “Add a 1756-DHRIO

Module” on page 17-11.

Complete this task.

Go to “Add a 1756-DHRIO

Module” on page 17-11.

The following example shows a local message and a remote message from a PLC-5 controller. Any type of network can link the

ControlLogix chassis.

EXAMPLE

Local and remote messages

ControlNet network

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B

5

5

5

0

C

N

B

5

5

5

0

DH+ network

P

L

C

5

Local

Message

Remote Message

In this task, you configure routing tables for 1756-DHRIO modules.

The modules use the routing tables to send the message to the destination.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-4 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

In the following example, two ControlLogix chassis link different DH+ networks together via a ControlNet network.

EXAMPLE

Routing table

ControlNet node 1

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B channel A

DH+ node 2

ControlLogix backplane link ID 10

ControlNet network link ID 100

DH+ network link ID 20

ControlNet node 2

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B channel A

DH+ node 3

ControlLogix backplane link ID 30

DH+ network link ID 40

Routing table for the left 1756-DHRIO module Routing table for the right 1756-DHRIO module

42190 42191

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-5

Configure a routing table for each 1756-DHRIO module that is along the route or path to the other controller:

Step:

A. For each network and each

ControlLogix backplane in your system, designate a unique link ID number.

Detailed actions:

Here is an example:

D

H

R

O

I

C

N

B

ControlLogix backplane link ID 10

ControlNet network link ID 100

D

H

R

O

I

C

N

B

ControlLogix backplane link ID 30

DH+ network link ID 20

DH+ network link ID 40

B. Connect the hardware.

1. Install the 1756-DHRIO module.

2. Connect the chassis to a network that you can access from your workstation. For example, perform one of the following:

Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756-DHRIO module.

Connect each chassis to an EtherNet/IP, ControlNet, or DH+ network.

3. Power-up each chassis.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-6 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

Step:

C. Display the routing table.

Detailed actions:

1. Start RSLinx software.

To expand a network one level, do one of the following:

Double-click the network.

Select the network and press the

key.

Click the + sign.

Workstation

+

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

2. Expand the network from step B. until you see the 1756-DHRIO module.

D. Define the link ID of the backplane in which the 1756-DHRIO module resides.

E. Define the link IDs of the

1756-DHRIO module.

F. Add the remaining communication module (s) that are in the backplane

(chassis).

Workstation

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

− xx, 1756-Lx

Backplane, 1756-Ax

+ xx, 1756-DHRIO

3. Right-click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration .

4. Click the DHRIO Routing Table tab.

1. At the top of the routing table, right-click the backplane link and choose

Edit Module …

2. Type the link ID of the backplane and choose OK .

1. Right-click the 1756-DHRIO module and choose Edit Module …

2. For each channel, type the link ID of the corresponding network.

3. Choose OK .

1. Right-click the backplane and choose Add Module …

2. Select the type of device and choose OK .

3. Type or select the slot number of the module.

4. Type the link ID(s) of the network(s) to which the module is connected.

5. Choose OK .

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-7

Step:

G. To the network (s) created in the previous step, add the corresponding communication modules in other ControlLogix chassis:

Detailed actions:

1. Right-click the link ID and choose Add Module …

2. Select the type of device and choose OK .

3. Type the node or IP address of the module.

4. Type the link ID(s):

For this module:

1756-ENET

1756-CNB

DH+ Bridge

5. Choose OK .

Type the link ID(s): of the backplane of the module (i.e., the

ControlLogix chassis in which the module resides) in the routine table of the added module

H. Repeat steps F. and G. until the routing table depicts the required networks.

I. Download and save the configuration.

1. To download the configuration to the module, choose Apply .

2. To save a copy of the configuration as a file, choose the Save to File button.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-8 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

Configure a 1756-DHRIO

Channel

If a:

PLC-5 controller

SLC 500 controller

ControlLogix controller

Determine if you must complete this task:

Sends a message to a:

ControlLogix controller

Over a: local network remote network

And there is: only one ControlLogix controller in the chassis more than one ControlLogix controller in the chassis

Then:

Complete this task.

Go to “Access ControlLogix Data” on page 17-20.

Go to “Access ControlLogix Data” on page 17-20.

Go to “Add a 1756-DHRIO

Module” on page 17-11.

In the following example, a 1756-DHRIO module automatically sends messages to a controller.

EXAMPLE

Route a local message

The 1756-DHRIO module automatically routes any local messages that it receives over Channel A to the controller that is in slot 2.

channel A

DH+ node 2

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B

5

5

5

0

DH+ network

Local

Message

P

L

C

5

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-9

A. Install the 1756-DHRIO module.

B. Connect the chassis to a network that you can access from your workstation.

For example, perform one of the following:

Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756-DHRIO module.

Connect the chassis to an EtherNet/IP or ControlNet network.

C. Power-up the chassis.

D. Start RSLinx software.

To expand a network one level, do one of the following:

Double-click the network.

Select the network and press the

key.

Click the + sign.

Workstation

+

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

E. Expand the network from step B. until you see the 1756-DHRIO

module.

Workstation

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

− xx, 1756-Lx

Backplane, 1756-Ax

+ xx, 1756-DHRIO

F. Right-click the DHRIO module and choose

Module Configuration.

G. Click the Channel Configuration tab.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-10 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

H.

I.

42193

H. If Channel A is configured for DH+, type the slot number of the controller that you want to receive local messages over this channel.

I. If Channel B is configured for DH+, type the slot number of the controller that you want to receive local messages over this channel.

J. To download the configuration to the module, choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-11

Add a 1756-DHRIO Module Determine if you must complete this task:

If a: Then:

ControlLogix controller sends the message Complete this task.

PLC-5 or SLC 500 controller sends the message

Go to “Access ControlLogix Data” on page 17-20.

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

D.

42376

B. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

C. Select your series of 1756-DHRIO module and click OK.

E.

D. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_DHRIO ).

E. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

F.

42440

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-12 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

F. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

G. Click Next.

H.

I.

42401

H. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-13

I. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

J. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-14 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

Enter a Message e e e e e e condition ?

/ e e e e e condition ?

/

A. Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction (s).

Message

Message Control

MSG

? ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

B. In the MSG instruction, type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key.

C. In the MSG instruction, right-click the message control tag and select New tag_name. (In older revisions of the software, the menu option is Create tag_name.

)

D. From the Scope list, select name_of_controller (controller), and click OK.

E.

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

E. Enter message.

EN.

where: message is the message control tag from step B.

F. If your message is to a PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

controller and it reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-15

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE condition

Read integers from a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos]

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE e condition

Write integers to a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller.

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression fal_control

?

0 all int_buffer[fal_control.pos] dint_array[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42424

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-16 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

Configure the Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. Select a configuration for the message:

Table 17.A Message to a ControlLogix controller

If you want to: read (receive) the data write (send) the data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

CIP Data Table Read first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

CIP Data Table Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer first element of the tag for the data in the other controller

Table 17.B Message to a SLC 500 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data floating-point (REAL) write (send) data read (receive) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag write (send) data Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

SLC Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10)

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

SLC Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-17

Table 17.C Message to a PLC-5 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data write (send) data floating-point (REAL) read (receive) data write (send) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

PLC5 Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10)

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0)

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. Click Browse …

E. Select the 1756-DHRIO module and click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-18 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

For a message to a:

ControlLogix controller

PLC-5 controller

SLC 500 controller

F. Specify the remaining communication properties:

1. - 5.

42466

Type or select:

1. Type a comma [ , ].

2. Type the port number from which the message exits:

For this port: backplane port of a 1756 controller or module

ControlNet port of a 1756-CNB module

EtherNet/IP port of a 1756-ENBx or -ENET module channel A of a 1756-DHRIO module channel B of a 1756-DHRIO module

Specify:

1

2

3

3. Type a comma [ , ].

4. Type the address of the next hardware device (e.g., controller, module):

For a device on a: Specify:

ControlLogix backplane slot number

ControlNet network node number

EtherNet/IP network IP address or DNS name

DH+ network 8# followed by the node number (e.g., 8#37)

5. Repeat steps 1. through 4. until you have specified the destination controller.

1. 2. 4.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

3.

1.

DH+

2. channel that is connected to the DH+ network

3. source link:

For a: local message remote message

5.

Specify:

0 (zero) link ID of the ControlLogix backplane (local chassis)

4. destination link:

For a: local message remote message

Specify:

0 (zero) link ID of the destination network

5. in octal, the DH+ node address of the PLC-5or SLC 500 controller

42467

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-19

The following examples depicts a communication path over an DH+ network:

EXAMPLE

DH+ path channel A

5

0

5

5

D

H

R

I

O

DH+ network

Message

5

0

5

5

D

H

R

I

O

DH+ address 10 (octal) washer, 2, 8#10, 1, 0 where: indicates: washer name of the 1756-DHRIO module

2

8#10

1

0 channel A of the 1756-DHRIO module octal address of the 1756-DHRIO module in the destination chassis backplane port of the 1756-DHRIO module in the destination chassis slot number of the destination controller

If the message is to a:

PLC-5 controller

SLC 500 controller

Logix5000 controller:

ControlLogix controller

FlexLogix controller

G. Select a cache option:

Then:

Disregard the Cache Connection check box.

How many Logix5000 controllers does this controller send messages to?

If: Then:

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

16 or less Logix5000 controllers more than 16 Logix5000 controllers

1. Select16 Logix5000 controllers that require the most frequent messages.

2. Is this message to one of those controllers?

If:

Yes

No

Then

Leave the Cache Connection check box checked.

Clear the Cache Connection check box.

H. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-20 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Access ControlLogix Data Complete this task for any message that a PLC-5 or SLC 500 controller sends to a ControlLogix controller over a DH+ network.

If the controllers are on: And there is: same network only one ControlLogix controller in the chassis more than one ControlLogix controller in the chassis different networks

Then the message is: local remote remote

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network 17-21

IMPORTANT

This procedure uses RSLogix 5

or RSLogix 500

™ software, revision 3.x.

A. Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software, as required, open the project for the PLC-5 or SLC 500 controller.

B. If the message is from a SLC 500 controller, in the MSG instruction, specify the following:

For this:

Target Device

Local/Remote

For a: local message remote message

Select:

PLC5

Local

Remote

C. Display the set-up screen for the message.

D. Select a set-up:

Table 17.D Set-up for a message from a PLC-5 controller to a ControlLogix controller

For a: local message

In this item:

Communication Command

Data Table Address (This PLC-5)

Size in Elements

Port Number

Data Table Address (Target Device)

Local DH+ Node (Octal)

Local/Remote

Specify:

PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5 Typed Write starting address of the data in the PLC-5 controller number of elements to read or write port through which the message exits

Type, in quotation marks [“ “], the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller (e.g., “count”).

node number of the 1756-DHRIO module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller

Local

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

17-22 Communicate with Another Controller Over a DH+

Network

Table 17.D Set-up for a message from a PLC-5 controller to a ControlLogix controller (Continued)

For a: remote message

In this item:

Communication Command

Data Table Address (This PLC-5)

Size in Elements

Port Number

Data Table Address (Target Device)

Local DH+ Node (Octal)

Local/Remote

Remote Link Type

Remote Station Address

Remote Bridge Link ID

Specify:

PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5 Typed Write starting address of the data in the PLC-5 controller number of elements to read or write port through which the message exits

Type, in quotation marks [“ “], the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller (e.g., “count”).

node number of the 1756-DHRIO module that is on the same network as the PLC-5 controller

Remote

Data Highway slot number of the ControlLogix controller, converted to octal link ID of the backplane in which the ControlLogix controller resides

Table 17.E Set-up for a message from a SLC 500 controller to a ControlLogix controller

For a: local message remote message

In this item:

Communication Command

Data Table Address (This Controller)

Size in Elements

Channel

Data Table Address (Target Device)

Local Node Addr (octal)

Communication Command

Data Table Address (This Controller)

Size in Elements

Channel

Data Table Address (Target Device)

Local Bridge Addr (octal)

Remote Bridge Addr

Remote Station Address

Remote Bridge Link ID

Specify:

PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller number of elements to read or write

1

Type, in quotation marks [“ “], the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller (e.g., “count”).

node number of the 1756-DHRIO module that is in the same chassis as the ControlLogix controller

PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write starting address of the data in the SLC 500 controller number of elements to read or write

1

Type, in quotation marks [“ “], the name of the tag in the ControlLogix controller (e.g., “count”).

node number of the 1756-DHRIO module that is on the same network as the SLC 500 controller

0 slot number of the ControlLogix controller, converted to octal link ID of the backplane in which the ControlLogix controller resides

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

18

Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a

DH+

Network

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this procedure to route a message from a PLC-5 or SLC 500 controller that is on a DH+ network to a PLC-5 or SLC 500 controller that is on a different network. The controller that receives the message can be on a:

• different DH+ network

• different type of network, such as a ControlNet network

In the following example, ControlLogix chassis route messages to controllers that are on different networks.

Route messages from a DH+ network

EXAMPLE

ControlNet node 3

C

5

P

L

Remote Message

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B

ControlNet node 1 channel A

DH+ node 2

ControlNet network

ControlLogix backplane

DH+ network

ControlNet node 2

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B channel A

DH+ node 3

ControlLogix backplane

DH+ network

5

0

0

S

L

C

DH+ node 1

Remote Message

C

5

P

L

DH+ node 4

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

18-2 Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network

Configure Routing Tables In this task, you configure routing tables for 1756-DHRIO modules.

The modules use the routing tables to send the message to the destination.

In the following example, two ControlLogix chassis link different DH+ networks together via a ControlNet network.

Routing table

EXAMPLE

ControlNet node 1

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B channel A

DH+ node 2

ControlLogix backplane link ID 10

ControlNet network link ID 100

DH+ network link ID 20

ControlNet node 2

D

H

R

I

O

C

N

B channel A

DH+ node 3

ControlLogix backplane link ID 30

DH+ network link ID 40

Routing table for the left 1756-DHRIO module Routing table for the right 1756-DHRIO module

42190 42191

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network 18-3

Configure a routing table for each 1756-DHRIO module that is along the route or path to the other controller:

Step:

A. For each network and each

ControlLogix backplane in your system, designate a unique link ID number.

Detailed actions:

Here is an example:

D

H

R

O

I

C

N

B

ControlLogix backplane link ID 10

ControlNet network link ID 100

D

H

R

O

I

C

N

B

ControlLogix backplane link ID 30

DH+ network link ID 20

DH+ network link ID 40

B. Connect the hardware.

1. Install the 1756-DHRIO module.

2. Connect the chassis to a network that you can access from your workstation. For example, perform one of the following:

Connect a serial cable to your workstation and a ControlLogix controller that is in the same chassis as the 1756-DHRIO module.

Connect each chassis to an EtherNet/IP, ControlNet, or DH+ network.

3. Power-up each chassis.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

18-4 Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network

Step:

C. Display the routing table.

Detailed actions:

1. Start RSLinx software.

To expand a network one level, do one of the following:

Double-click the network.

Select the network and press the

key.

Click the + sign.

Workstation

+

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

2. Expand the network from step B. until you see the 1756-DHRIO module.

D. Define the link ID of the backplane in which the 1756-DHRIO module resides.

E. Define the link IDs of the

1756-DHRIO module.

F. Add the remaining communication module (s) that are in the backplane

(chassis).

Workstation

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

− xx, 1756-Lx

Backplane, 1756-Ax

+ xx, 1756-DHRIO

3. Right-click the DHRIO module and choose Module Configuration .

4. Click the DHRIO Routing Table tab.

1. At the top of the routing table, right-click the backplane link and choose

Edit Module …

2. Type the link ID of the backplane and choose OK .

1. Right-click the 1756-DHRIO module and choose Edit Module …

2. For each channel, type the link ID of the corresponding network.

3. Choose OK .

1. Right-click the backplane and choose Add Module …

2. Select the type of device and choose OK .

3. Type or select the slot number of the module.

4. Type the link ID(s) of the network(s) to which the module is connected.

5. Choose OK .

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network 18-5

Step:

G. To the network (s) created in the previous step, add the corresponding communication modules in other ControlLogix chassis:

Detailed actions:

1. Right-click the link ID and choose Add Module …

2. Select the type of device and choose OK .

3. Type the node or IP address of the module.

4. Type the link ID(s):

For this module:

1756-ENET

1756-CNB

DH+ Bridge

5. Choose OK .

Type the link ID(s): of the backplane of the module (i.e., the

ControlLogix chassis in which the module resides) in the routine table of the added module

H. Repeat steps F. and G. until the routing table depicts the required networks.

I. Download and save the configuration.

1. To download the configuration to the module, choose Apply .

2. To save a copy of the configuration as a file, choose the Save to File button.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

18-6 Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network

Configure a PLC-5 or SLC

500 Message

IMPORTANT

This procedure uses RSLogix 5

or RSLogix 500

™ software, revision 3.x.

A. Using either RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software, as required, open the project for the controller that sends the message.

B. If a SLC 500 controller sends the message, in the MSG instruction, specify the following:

For this:

Target Device

Local/Remote

For a message to a:

SLC 500 controller

PLC-5 controller

Select:

500CPU

PLC5

Remote

C. Display the set-up screen for the message.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network 18-7

D. Select a set-up:

Specify: For a message from a:

PLC-5 controller

In this item:

Communication Command

Data Table Address (This PLC-5)

Size in Elements

Port Number

Data Table Address (Target Device)

Local DH+ Node (Octal)

SLC 500 controller

Local/Remote

Remote Link Type

Remote Station Address

Remote Bridge Link ID

Communication Command

Data Table Address (This Controller)

Size in Elements

Channel

Data Table Address (Target Device)

Local Bridge Addr (octal)

Remote Bridge Addr

Remote Station Address

Remote Bridge Link ID

PLC-5 Typed Read or PLC-5 Typed Write starting address of the data in the controller that sends the message number of elements to read or write port through which the message exits starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message node number of the 1756-DHRIO module that is on the same network as the controller that sends the message

Remote

Data Highway node number of the controller that receives the message link ID of the DH+ network of the controller that receives the message

PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write starting address of the data in the controller that sends the message number of elements to read or write

1 starting address of the data in the controller that receives the message node number of the 1756-DHRIO module that is on the same network as the controller that sends the message

0 node number of the controller that receives the message link ID of the network of the controller that receives the message

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

18-8 Route PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

Messages From a DH+

Network

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

19

Communicate with Another Controller over a

DH-485 Network

When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to get information to and from controllers over a

DH-485 network.

FlexLogix™ controller

DH-485 network

1761-NET-AIC+ connection from FlexLogix controller to port 1 or port 2

1747-AIC

ControlLogix™ controller

1761-NET-AIC+ connection from ControlLogix controller to port 1 or port 2

1761-NET-AIC+

SLC 5/03™ controller

MicroLogix™ controller

CompactLogix™ controller

42589

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

19-2 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network

How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Step 1: Connect the Controller to an AIC+

Step 2: Configure the Serial Port

Step 3: Enter a Message

Step 4: Configure the Message

Step 5: Check the LED

Step 6: Stagger the Messages

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step 1: Connect the

Controller to an AIC+

Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network 19-3

In this step, you install a 1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter

(AIC+), which connects the ControlLogix controller to the DH-485 network.

1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+)

RS-485 port port 2: mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port 1: DB-9 RS-232, DTE dc power source selector switch terminals for external 24V dc power supply

A. Install an AIC+:

1. Connect the AIC+ to a 24 VDC power supply.

2. On the DC SOURCE switch, select External.

3. Connect the RS-485 port to the DH-485 network.

B. Connect the serial port of the ControlLogix controller to either port 1 or port 2 of the AIC+:

If you connect to this port: port 1

DB-9 RS-232, DTE connection port 2 mini-DIN 8 RS-232 connection

Over this distance:

< 45 cm (17.7 in)

> 45 cm (17.7 in)

< 45 cm (17.7 in)

> 45 cm (17.7 in)

Use this cable:

1761-CBL-AC00

1756-CP3

1761-CBL-AP00

1761-CBL-PM02

For additional information, see AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter

User Manual, publication 1761-6.4.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

19-4 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network

Step 2: Configure the Serial

Port

42376

A. Right-click Controller name_of_controller and select

Properties.

B. Click the Serial Port tab.

C.

D.

42587

C. Select System (default).

D. Select 19200.

E. Click Apply.

F. Click the System Protocol tab.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network 19-5

G.

H.

42588

G. Select DH485.

H. Type the address of the controller on the DH-485 network.

Follow these guidelines:

Address 0 is typically reserved for the programming tool.

Address 1 is typically left open to swap out a controller. Most controllers have a default address of 1.

The maximum address is 31.

To optimize network performance, assign addresses in sequential order.

Assign initiators, such as personal computers, the lowest addresses. This minimizes the time required to initialize the network.

I. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

19-6 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network

Step 3: Enter a Message e e e e e e condition ?

/ e e e e e condition ?

/

A. Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction (s).

Message

Message Control

MSG

? ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

B. In the MSG instruction, type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key.

C. In the MSG instruction, right-click the message control tag and select New tag_name.

(In older revisions of the software, the menu option is Create tag_name.

)

D. From the Scope list, select name_of_controller (controller), and click OK.

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

E. Enter message.

EN.

where: message is the message control tag from step B.

F. If your message is to an SLC 500

or MicroLogix

controller

and it reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

SLC 500 and MicroLogix controllers require 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network 19-7

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE condition

Read integers from a MicroLogix controller

When condition turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos]

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE e condition

Write integers to a MicroLogix controller

When condition turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller.

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression fal_control

?

0 all int_buffer[fal_control.pos] dint_array[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42424

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

19-8 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network

Step 4: Configure the

Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. Select a configuration for the message:

Table 19.A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller

If the data is: structure (s)

And you want to: read (receive) the data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element not structure (s) write (send) the data

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element read (receive) the data Message Type

Source Element write (send) the data

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

CIP Data Table Read first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

CIP Data Table Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer first element of the tag for the data in the other controller

PLC5 Typed Read

@ name where: name is the first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller.

number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer

@ name where: name is the first element of the tag for the data in the other controller.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network 19-9

Table 19.B Message to an SLC 500 or MicroLogix controller

If the data is: integer (s) floating-point (REAL)

And you want to: read (receive) data write (send) data read (receive) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag write (send) data Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

SLC Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10)

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

SLC Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0)

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. In the Path box, type the following path:

2, station_address where: station_address is the DF1 address of the controller that is receiving the message.

E. Leave the communication method at the default settings of:

CIP

Cache Connections (This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port.)

F. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

19-10 Communicate with Another Controller over a DH-485 Network

Step 5: Check the LED Once you download the project to the controller, use the RS232 LED, on the front of the controller, to determine if there are other stations on the DH-485 network.

Step 6: Stagger the

Messages

If the RS232 LED is: flashing steady

42525

Then:

There are no other stations on the DH-485 network.

There is at least one other station on the DH-485 network.

As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When to Use This

Procedure

Chapter

20

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Use this procedure to monitor and control I/O over a remote I/O network.

Remote I/O Network

ControlLogix Chassis with

1756-DHRIO Module

PanelView Terminal

1771-ASB Adapter

PLC-5 Controller

1791 Block I/O

1794-ASB Adapter

1747-ASB Adapter

42471

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-2 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

How to Use This Procedure

TIP

To create and manage tags as you program your logic, use these tips:

To create a tag:

1. Type the name for the tag.

2. Right-click the tag and choose New "tag_name".

To change the name of a tag:

Right-click the tag and choose Edit "tag_name"

Properties.

If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary tasks:

Add a 1756-DHRIO Module

To complete this procedure, do the following tasks:

Add a Remote I/O Adapter

Add a Block Transfer Module

Communicate with Block Transfer Modules, using either of these procedures:

Read or Write Data To or From a Block Transfer Module

Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer

Modules

Address I/O

Validate Connections

Stagger the Messages

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-3

Add a 1756-DHRIO Module

1. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

4.

6.

42376

2. Right-click I/O Configuration and select New Module.

3. Select your series of 1756-DHRIO module and click OK.

5.

4. Type a name for the module (i.e., name_of_DHRIO ).

5. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

6. For the channel that is connected to the remote I/O network, select RIO.

7. Select the baud rate of the network.

7.

8.

42440

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-4 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

8. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

9. Click Next.

10.

11.

12.

42401

10. Type the rate at which the module must communicate with the controller.

11. Initially, do you want to prevent the module from communicating with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-5

12. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

13. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-6 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Add a Remote I/O Adapter In this task, you add remote I/0 adapters for each rack, or portion of a rack, in the chassis:

If the chassis contains: less than 1 rack of I/O

1 rack of I/O more than 1 rack of I/O

Then add:

1 adapter for the chassis

1 adapter for each rack

EXAMPLE

Add remote I/O adapters

The I/O configuration of the controller requires two remote I/O adapters for this chassis. One adapter is for rack 1, and the second adapter is for the 1/2 of rack 2.

rack 1 rack 2

1

A

S

B

1

7

7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-DHRIO/x name_of_DHRIO

1. Right-click name_of_DHRIO and select New Module.

2. Select an adapter module and click OK.

If the I/O is:

1747

1771

1791

1794

Then select:

1747-ASB

1771-ASB

RIO-ADAPTER

1794-ASB

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-7

3.

5.

42441

3. Type a name for the adapter module. Use a name that identifies the I/O of this adapter.

4. Type or select rack number of this module.

5. Select the channel on 1756-DHRIO module that is network is connected to.

6. Type or select the starting group number.

7. For the rack number of this adapter, select the number of groups in this chassis. Round up to the nearest even number of groups.

8. Click Next.

4.

6.

7.

9.

10.

11.

42401

9. Type the rate at which the I/O of this adapter must update.

10. Initially, do you want the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared

(unchecked).

Select the check box.

Notes:

When you test this portion of the system, clear the check box.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-8 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

11. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

12. Click Finish.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Add a Block Transfer

Module

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-9

Do any modules require block transfers?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Complete the steps in this section (Add a Block Transfer Module)

Go to Address I/O on page 20-26..

Though not required, when the module is in the I/O configuration, you gain these advantages:

It is easier to complete the communication path to the module.

The I/O configuration provides documentation about the module.

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-DHRIO/x name_of_DHRIO

Ch <rack group size> RIO-ADAPTER name_of_adapter

1. Right-click name_of_adapter and select New Module.

2. Select RIO-MODULE and click OK.

3.

4.

5.

3. Type a name for the module.

4. Type or select the group number of the module.

5. Type or select the slot number that the module is in.

6. Click Finish.

42442

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-10 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Read or Write Data To or

From a Block Transfer

Module

Use this procedure to transfer data to or from a module that requires block transfers.

Block Transfer Read

1 2

Data from a

BT module

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Buffer of INTs int_buffer_read[0] int_buffer_read[1] int_buffer_read[2]

DINTs for use in the project dints_input[0] dints_input[1] dints_input[2]

1. The MSG instruction reads 16-bit integers (INTs) from the BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs.

2. An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32-bit integers (DINTs).

Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs.

Block Transfer Write

1 2

DINTs from the project dints_output[0] dints_output[1] dints_output[2]

Buffer of INTs int_buffer_write[0] int_buffer_write[1] int_buffer_write[2]

Data for a BT module

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

1. An FAL instruction converts the 32-bit integers (DINTs) from the

Logix5000 controller to 16-bit integers (INTs):

Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs.

The instruction stores the data in a temporary array of INTs.

2. The MSG instruction writes the INTs from the temporary array to

BT module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-11

Read Data From a Block Transfer Module

1. Enter the following rung:

Reads 16-bit integers (INTs) from the module and stores them in int_buffer_read . (Only include the msg_write.EN

tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer write message to the same module.) msg_read.EN

/ msg_write.EN

/

MSG

Type - Block Transfer Read

Message Control msg_read ...

EN

DN

ER

42463

Tag Name: msg_read msg_write

Description: block transfer read message

Data Type:

MESSAGE block transfer write message to the same module MESSAGE

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-12 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

2. Enter the following rung:

When msg_read is done, the FAL instruction moves the values in int_buffer_read to dints_input . This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the controller.

msg_read.DN

ints_to_dints

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression ints_to_dints

0

ALL dints_input[ints_to_dints.POS] int_buffer_read[ints_to_dints.POS]

EN

DN

ER

42463

Tag Name: int_buffer_read ints_to_dints

FAL Length dint_inputs

Description: Data Type: array that stores the data from the BT module INT [ length ] converts the 16-bit integers from the BT module to 32-bit integers for the Logix5000 controller number of elements to convert

CONTROL immediate value equal to length array that stores the input data from the module for use by the controller

DINT [ length ]

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Where: length

Is the: number of elements to transfer

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-13

Write Configuration or Output Data To a Block Transfer Module

1. Enter the following rung:

The application writes configuration and output data to dints_output , which is an array of DINTs. Before the controller sends the data to the module, the FAL instruction moves the values to int_buffer_write . This converts them to 16-bit integers (INTs). (Only include the msg_read.EN

tag and associated instruction if you also send a block transfer read message to the same module.) msg_read.EN

/ msg_write.EN

/ dints_to_ints

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode dints_to_ints

0

ALL int_buffer_write[dints_to_ints.POS] Dest

Expression dints_output[dints_to_ints.POS]

EN

DN

ER

42463

Tag Name: msg_read msg_write

Description: block transfer read message to the same module block transfer write message

Data Type:

MESSAGE

MESSAGE dints_to_ints

FAL Length converts the 32-bit integers from the Logix5000 controller to 16-bit integers for the BT module number of elements to convert

CONTROL immediate value equal to length int_buffer_write array that stores the data to send to the BT module as 16-bit integers dints_output array that stores the output data that other instructions produce for the module

INT [ length ]

DINT [ length ]

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Where: length

Is the: number of elements to transfer

2. Enter the following rung:

After the FAL instruction converts the DINTs to INTs, the MSG instruction sends the data in int_buffer_write to the module.

dints_to_ints.DN

MSG

Type - Block Transfer Write

Message Control msg_write ...

EN

DN

ER

42463

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-14 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

If you want to: read input data write configuration or output data

Configure the Messages

1. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

2. Select a configuration:

For this item:

Message Type

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Type or select:

Block Transfer Read number of INTs to read int_buffer_read [0]

Block Transfer Write int_buffer_write [0] number of INTs to write

3. Click the Communication tab.

4. Click Browse …

5. Select the RIO-MODULE and click OK.

6. How many devices require block transfer instructions?

If:

16 or less devices more than 16 devices

Then:

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

A. Select 16 devices that require the most frequent updates.

B. Is this message to one of those devices?

If:

Yes

No

Then

Leave the Cache Connection check box selected (checked).

Clear the Cache Connection check box.

7. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-15

Read or Write Data To or

From Multiple Block

Transfer Modules

Input data from the first BT module

Input data from the next BT module

Data from a

BT module

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Use this procedure to program a single MSG instruction to read data from multiple block transfer modules.

The following diagram shows the flow of data for a block transfer read. The block transfer write sequence works in the opposite order.

1

3

Buffer of INTs

BT_int_buffer_read[0]

BT_int_buffer_read[1]

BT_int_buffer_read[2]

BT_int_buffer_read[0]

BT_int_buffer_read[1]

BT_int_buffer_read[2]

BT_int_buffer_read[3]

BT_int_buffer_read[4]

2

4

DINTs for use in the project

BT_input[0,0]

BT_input[0,1]

BT_input[0,2]

BT_input[0,3]

BT_input[0,4]

BT_input[1,0]

BT_input[1,1]

BT_input[1,2]

BT_input[1,3]

BT_input[1,4]

Input data that is allocated for the first BT module

Input data that is allocated for the next BT module

1. The MSG instruction reads 16-bit integers (INTs) from the first

BT module and stores them in a temporary array of INTs.

2. An FAL instruction converts the INTs to 32-bit integers (DINTs).

Logix5000 controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with DINTs.

3. The MSG instruction reads the next module. This procedures lets you vary the number of INTs that you read from each module.

4. The FAL instruction moves the data to the next element of dimension 0 of the DINT array. Each element of this dimension corresponds to a different BT module.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-16 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

To read multiple block transfer modules:

Create a User-Defined Data Type

Create the Data Array

Send the Message to a BT Module

Enter the Message Properties for Each Module

Convert the INTs to DINTs

Step to the Next BT Module

To write data to multiple block transfer modules, see the logic on

page 20-24.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-17

Create a User-Defined Data Type

Create the following data type. You will use this for the array that stores the message properties for each module.

+

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Trends

Data Types

User-Defined 1. Right-click and select New

Data Type.

2. Assign the following:

Name

Description

Members

Name

REQ_LEN

BT_CONFIGURATION

Configuration properties for a block transfer message to a specific module

Data Type

INT

Style

Decimal

+

Channel

Rack

Group

Slot

Path

SINT

SINT

SINT

SINT

STRING

ASCII

Octal

Decimal

Decimal

Description number of elements (INTs) to read or write channel (A or B) of the 1756-DHRIO module to which this module is connected rack number of the module (octal) group number of the module slot number of the module path to the 1756-DHRIO module (Use the

Message Path editor to assign the path.)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-18 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Create the Data Array

1. Enter the following rung:

The SIZE instruction determines the number of elements in the first dimension (Dim 0) of the BT_input array. Since this dimension contains one element for each BT module, this instruction determines how many modules the MSG instruction must read. A subsequent rung uses this number to determine the end of the sequence of MSGs.

43014

2. Right-click each undefined tag, select New “name”, and assign the following properties:

Name: Description:

BT_input data from each BT module

The first dimension represents each module.

The second dimension represents the data from a module.

BT_input_modules number of modules that the MSG instruction must read

Data Type: Scope:

DINT [ number,length ] name_of_controller

(controller)

DINT name_of_controller

(controller)

Where: number length

Is the: number of modules that this message reads maximum number of elements in any of the block transfers

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-19

Send the Message to a BT Module

1. Enter the following rung:

The MSG instruction reads the input values from a BT module and stores the values in BTR_int_buffer_read

Each time the instruction is done, it automatically restarts and sends another message.

.

Prior to each message, the series of MOV and COPY instructions load the appropriate configuration properties into the MSG instruction so it can read the next BT module. The configuration properties load from the

After each MSG, a subsequent rung increments the

BTR_cfg array.

BTR_index tag. This loads the configuration properties for the next module into the MSG instruction before it executes again.

43014

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-20 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Name:

BTR

BTR_cfg

BTR_index

2. Right-click each undefined tag, select New “name”, and assign the following properties:

Description: block transfer message that reads data from each BT module array of configuration properties for each BT module controls which BT module that the MSG instruction reads

Data Type:

MESSAGE

BT_CONFIGURATION

[ number ]

DINT

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller) name_of_controller

(controller)

Where: number

3. Configure the message:

Is the: number of modules that this message reads

On this tab:

Configuration

Communication

For this item:

Message Type

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Path

RIO or ControlNet

Cache Connection check box

Type or select:

Block Transfer Read

1 (The dialog box requires an initial value.)

BTR_int_buffer_read

To create this tag:

A. Click New Tag .

B. Type the name.

C. In the Data type box, type INT[ length ], where length equals the length variable of the BT_input tag from

page 20-18.

D. Choose OK .

Path to the 1756-DHRIO module:

A. Click Browse…

B. Select the RIO-MODULE with which you want to communicate.

C. Choose OK .

This complete the Module Address properties. Although your logic will change the path and module address, the Message Properties dialog box requires an initial set of properties.

RIO

Clear the Cache Connection check box..

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-21

Enter the Message Properties for Each Module

Properties for the first

BT module

Properties for the next

BT module

42376

1. Double-click Controller Tags.

2. Enter the message properties for each BT module.

Tag Name Value

− BTR_cfg

− BTR_cfg[0]

+ BTR_cfg[0].REQ_LEN

number of elements to transfer

+ BTR_cfg[0].Channel

( … )

( … ) channel (A or B) of the 1756-DHRIO module that is connected to the RIO network

+ BTR_cfg[0].Rack

+ BTR_cfg[0].Group

+ BTR_cfg[0].Slot

+ BTR_cfg[0].Path

rack number of the module (octal) group number of the module (depends on chassis addressing) slot number of the module (depends on chassis addressing) path to the 1756-DHRIO module:

A. Right-click and select Go to Message Path Editor .

B. Select the 1756-DHRIO module.

C. Choose OK .

+ BTR_cfg [1]

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-22 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Convert the INTs to DINTs

1. Enter the following rung:

After the MSG instruction reads data from a module ( BTR.DN

is on), this rung converts the INT values from the BT module to DINT values for use in the project:

The MOV instruction sets the length of the FAL instruction equal to the number of elements that the MSG reads.

The FAL instruction then loads the values from BTR_int_buffer_read into BT_input . This converts the values to

DINTs for use in the project.

BTR_index determines where in the first dimension of dimension corresponds to a specific BT module.

BT_input to store the values. Each element of this

43015

2. Right-click each undefined tag, select New “name”, and assign the following properties:

Name: Description:

BTR_ints_to_dints converts the 16-bit integers from the BT module to 32-bit integers for the Logix5000 project

Data Type:

CONTROL

Scope: name_of_controller

(controller)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-23

Step to the Next BT Module

1. Enter the following rung:

After the MSG instruction reads data from a module and the FAL converts it to DINTs ( BTR_ints_to_dints.DN

is on), the

ADD instruction increments the BTR_index . This lets the MSG instruction read the next module.

43015

2. Enter the following rung:

If the EQU instruction is true, the MSG instruction has read the last BT module. The CLR instruction resets BTR_index to zero. This lets the MSG instruction start the series of reads again, starting with the first module.

43015

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-24 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Write Data to Multiple Block Transfer Modules

43035

43035

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-25

43036

43037

43037

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-26 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Address I/O To monitor or control an I/O device, assign the tag name of the device to an instruction in your logic:

For step-by-step instructions on how to enter logic and tag names, see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures, publication 1756-PM001.

All the data for I/O modules is at the controller scope. As you assign addresses, click the Controller Scoped Tags button to see the I/O tags.

Use the following table to select the address of an I/O device:

If the device is: digital analog

Then use this address: name:type.

Data [group].bit

element of the array that stores the data for or from this device

Where: name type group bit

Is: name of the remote I/O adapter, such as the 1771-ASB module

Use the name for the rack that contains the module to which this device is wired.

Use the name from the I/O configuration of the controller.

type of device:

If: input I

Then: output O group number of the module to which this device is wired point (bit) number to which this device is wired

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-27

EXAMPLE

Address a digital device that is wired to a 1771 I/O module

I/O Configuration

[5] 1756-DHRIO/B Local_DHRIO

B <004 0 1> 17771-ASB Remote_Rack_4 adapter module for rack number 4 input device group 2 bit 0

Remote_Rack_4:I.Data[2].0

42435

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-28 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Validate Connections Is this task, you verify that the controller can communicate with the devices that you have just configured.

Step:

A. Determine if communications are established.

B. Identify a fault. Start at the local communication module and work down through the tree.

C. Identify the fault code.

Detailed actions:

Is a

!

over the I/O Configuration folder?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

The controller can communicate with the module.

Communications are not established. Go to the next step.

1.

2.

!

I/O Configuration

3.

!

[x] 1756-YYY/x local_com_module

!

z 17xx-YYY adapter_1

!

[0] 17xx-YYY module_1

!

[1] 17xx-YYY module_2

1. Right-click the module and select Properties .

2. Click the Connection tab.

3.

3. Identify the code for the fault.

42437

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step:

D. Clear the fault.

Detailed actions:

1. From the Help menu, select Contents .

2. Click the Index tab.

3. Type module faults .

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network 20-29

E. Go to step A.

4.

4. Select the range for the code and click Display .

5. Scroll down to your fault code and follow the recommendations.

42439

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

20-30 Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

Stagger the Messages As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Program a message to communicate with multiple devices. Refer to Read or Write Data To or From Multiple Block Transfer

Modules on page 20-15

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

21

Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable

When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure when you want to perform any of the following over a serial cable:

• download a project to a controller

• go online and monitor a controller

• edit a project while it is running in a controller

• save online changes to the offline project file (upload)

Preface

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary step:

Step 1: Connect a Serial Cable

To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Step 2: Configure a Serial Driver

Step 3: Select a Path

42385

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

21-2 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable

Step 1: Connect a Serial

Cable

I

40043

A. Obtain a 1756-CP3 serial cable. (You can also use a 1747-CP3 cable from the SLC product family, but once the cable is connected you cannot close the controller door.)

TIP

If you make your own serial cable:

Limit the length to 15.2m (50 ft).

Wire the connectors as follows:

Workstation Controller

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

1 CD

2 RDX

3 TXD

4 DTR

COMMON

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9

Attach the shield to both connectors.

42231

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable 21-3

1756-CP3 cable

20884

B. Connect the cable to the controller and to your workstation.

Step 2: Configure a Serial

Driver

1. Start RSLinx

software.

2. From the Communications menu, select Configure Drivers.

3. From the Available Driver Types list, select RS-232 DF1 Devices.

4. Click Add New.

5. Click OK to accept the default name for the driver.

6. From the Comm Port drop-down list, select the serial port (on the workstation) that the cable is connected to.

7. From the Device drop-down list, select Logix 5550-Serial Port.

8. Click Auto-Configure.

9. Does the dialog box display the following message:

Auto Configuration Successful!

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Click OK .

Go to step 6. and verify that you selected the correct Comm Port.

10. Click Close.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

21-4 Download and Go Online over a Serial Cable

Step 3: Select a Path

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project for the controller.

B. From the Communications menu, select Who Active.

To expand a network one level, click the

+ sign.

Workstation

+

+

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

TCP-1, Ethernet

C. Expand the DF1 driver to the level of the controller.

Workstation

+

Linx Gateways, Ethernet

AB_DF1-x, DF1

+ xx, 1756-Lx

TCP-1, Ethernet

D. Select the controller and choose a button. You may have to confirm the action.

To: monitor the project in the controller transfer a copy of the project from the controller to

RSLogix 5000 software transfer the open project to the controller

Choose:

Go Online

Upload

Download

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

22

Configure DF1 Master and Slave

Communications

When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to get information to and from remote controllers

(stations) when:

Your system contains three or more stations.

Communications occur on a regular basis and require leased-line, radio, or power-line modems.

42378

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-2 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary step:

Step 1: Connect and Configure the Modems

To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Step 2: Select a Polling Mode

Step 3: Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling

Step 4: Configure the Master Controller for Message-Based

Polling

Step 5: Configure a Slave Controller

Step 6: Enter a Message

Step 7: Configure the Message

Step 8: Stagger the Messages

For additional information, see SCADA System Application Guide, publication AG-6.5.8.

Step 1: Connect and

Configure the Modems

A. Using the following Allen-Bradley cable, connect each controller to the modem:

A-B 1784-CAS, 25-pin male modem connector

The cable has the following wiring: controller

(9-pin female)

DCD 1

2 RXD

TXD

DTR

3

4

COMMON

DSR

RTS

CTS

7

8

5

6

4

5

7

6

3

2 modem

(25-pin male)

8

20

B. Configure the modems.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-3

Step 2: Select a Polling

Mode

Determine if you will use standard polling or message-based polling:

If: data is time critical slave controllers will initiate messages you want to use logic to control when communication occurs

Then go to:

Step 3: Configure the Master Controller for Standard Polling

On page:

22-3

Step 4: Configure the Master Controller for Message-Based Polling 22-8

Step 3: Configure the

Master Controller for

Standard Polling

Determine if you must complete this step:

If you are using this polling mode: standard message-based

Then:

Complete this step

Go to Step 4: Configure the Master

Controller for Message-Based Polling

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project.

Scope: controller controller controller

42376

B. Create the following tags:

Name: list_priority_poll list_normal_poll list_active_stations

Data Type:

DINT [x] where: x is 2 plus the number of stations that you will poll more frequently than other stations.

For example, if you want to poll 5 stations more frequently, create an array of 7 elements.

DINT [x] where: x is 2 plus the remaining number of stations. (The stations that you did not include in list_priority_poll.

)

BOOL[256]

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-4 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

42376

C. Right-click Controller name_of_controller and select

Properties.

D. Click the Serial Port tab.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

E.

F.

I.

J.

G.

H.

42251

E. Select System (default).

F. Select the settings for your DF1 network.

G. Select Half Duplex.

H. Clear (uncheck) the Continuous Carrier check box (default).

I. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent. For example, a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay.

J. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low).

Q.

R.

S.

U.

V.

M.

P.

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-5

K. Click Apply.

L. Click the System Protocol tab.

N.

O.

42388

M. Select DF1 Master.

N. Select the error detection method that your equipment uses.

O. Do you want to receive duplicate messages?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected.

Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box.

P. Type an address between 0 and 254 for this controller.

Q. Is it critical to keep the poll list scan time to a minimum?

If:

No

Yes

Then select:

Standard (multiple message transfer per node scan)

Standard (single message transfer per node scan)

T.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-6 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

R. Determine when the master controller should send its messages:

To send messages to slave stations: before polling the next station when the station number of the master appears in the polling lists

Select:

Between station polls

In polling sequence

S. Select the list_normal_poll

tag (step B.)

T. After polling the priority stations, how many normal stations do you want to poll?

If: all not all

Then:

Leave the default of 0.

Type the number to poll before returning to the priority stations.

U. Select the list_priority_poll

tag (step B.)

V. Select the list_active_stations

tag (step B.)

W. Click OK.

X. Double-click Controller Tags.

42376

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-7

Y. In the list_priority_poll

tag (step B.), enter the

addresses of the priority stations to poll:

If this controller (master) sends its messages in the polling

sequence (step R.), include this controller in the list.

Enter the addresses in the order that you want them polled.

Tag Name

− list_priority_poll

+ list_priority_poll [0]

+ list_priority_poll [1]

+ list_priority_poll [2]

+ list_priority_poll [3]

+ list_priority_poll […]

Value total number of priority stations

( … ) leave blank address of the first station to poll address of the second station to poll address of the next station to poll

Z. In the list_normal_poll

tag (step B.), enter the addresses

of the normal stations to poll.

If this controller (master) sends its messages in the polling

sequence (step R.), include this controller in the list.

Enter the addresses in the order that you want them polled.

Tag Name

− list_normal_poll

+ list_normal_poll [0]

+ list_normal_poll [1]

+ list_normal_poll [2]

+ list_normal_poll [3]

+ list_normal_poll […]

Value

( … ) total number of normal stations leave blank address of the first station to poll address of the second station to poll address of the next station to poll

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-8 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

Step 4: Configure the

Master Controller for

Message-Based Polling

Determine if you must complete this step:

If you are using this polling mode: standard message-based

Then:

Go to Step 5: Configure a Slave Controller

Complete this step

A. Open the RSLogix 5000 project.

42376

B. Right-click Controller name_of_controller and select

Properties.

C. Click the Serial Port tab.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

D. Select System (default).

E. Select the settings for your DF1 network.

F. Select Half Duplex.

G. Clear (uncheck) the Continuous Carrier check box (default).

42251

L.

O.

P.

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-9

H. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent. For example, a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay.

I. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low).

J. Click Apply.

K. Click the System Protocol tab.

M.

N.

L. Select DF1 Master.

M. Select the error detection method that your equipment uses.

N. Do you want to receive duplicate messages?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected.

Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box.

O. Type an address between 0 and 254 for this controller.

P. Do you want to ignore messages from slave stations?

If:

No

Yes

Then select:

Message Based (slave can initiate messages)

Message Based (slave cannot initiate messages)

A slave station can only send a message when it receives a message from this controller (master).

Q. Click OK.

42388

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-10 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

Step 5: Configure a Slave

Controller

A. Open the RSLogix 5000 project for the slave controller.

42376

B. Right-click Controller name_of_controller and select

Properties.

C. Click the Serial Port tab.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

42251

D. Select System (default).

E. Select the settings for your DF1 network.

F. Select Half Duplex.

G. Clear (uncheck) the Continuous Carrier check box (default).

H. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent. For example, a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay.

I. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low).

L.

O.

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-11

J. Click Apply.

K. Click the System Protocol tab.

M.

N.

L. Select DF1 Slave.

M. Select the error detection method that your equipment uses.

N. Do you want to receive duplicate messages?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected.

Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box.

O. Type an address between 0 and 254 for this controller.

P. Click OK.

42388

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-12 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

Step 6: Enter a Message e e e e e e condition ?

/ e e e e e condition ?

/

Regardless of whether you use standard polling or message-based polling, you must use a MSG instruction to transfer data between controllers:

A. Enter a MSG instruction and associated input instruction (s).

Message

Message Control

MSG

? ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

B. In the MSG instruction, type a name for the message control tag and press the Enter key.

C. In the MSG instruction, right-click the message control tag and select New tag_name. (In older revisions of the software, the menu option is Create tag_name.

)

D. From the Scope list, select name_of_controller (controller), and click OK.

E.

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42424

E. Enter message.

EN.

where: message is the message control tag from step B.

F. If your message is to a PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

controller and it reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-13

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE condition

Read integers from a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos]

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE e condition

Write integers to a PLC-5 controller

When condition turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends int_buffer to the other controller.

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode

Dest

Expression fal_control

?

0 all int_buffer[fal_control.pos] dint_array[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42424

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-14 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

Step 7: Configure the

Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. Select a configuration for the message:

Table 22.A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller

If the data is: structure (s)

And you want to: read (receive) the data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element not structure (s) write (send) the data

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element read (receive) the data Message Type

Source Element write (send) the data

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

CIP Data Table Read first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

CIP Data Table Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer first element of the tag for the data in the other controller

PLC5 Typed Read

@ name where: name is the first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller.

number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer

@ name where: name is the first element of the tag for the data in the other controller.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-15

Table 22.B Message to a PLC-5 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data write (send) data floating-point (REAL) read (receive) data write (send) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

PLC5 Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10)

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-16 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

Table 22.C Message to a SLC 500 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data floating-point (REAL) write (send) data read (receive) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag write (send) data Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

SLC Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10)

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

SLC Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0)

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. In the Path box, type the following path:

2, station_address where: station_address is the DF1 address of the controller that is receiving the message.

E. Leave the communication method at the default settings of:

CIP

Cache Connections (This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port.)

F. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Step 8: Stagger the

Messages

Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications 22-17

As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22-18 Configure DF1 Master and Slave Communications

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure Dial-Up Communications

Chapter

23

When to Use this Procedure Use this procedure to send a message to another controller over a public telephone line.

Preface

1

How to Use This Procedure If you have not already done so in a previous procedure, do the following preliminary step:

Step 1: Connect and Configure the Modems

To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Step 2: Configure the Serial Port of the Controller

Step 3: Dial the Other Controller

Step 4: Send the Message

Step 5: Configure the Message

Step 6: Hang-Up

Step 7: Stagger the Messages

For additional information, see SCADA System Application Guide, publication AG-6.5.8.

42394

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

23-2 Configure Dial-Up Communications

Step 1: Connect and

Configure the Modems

A. Connect each controller to the modem using the following

Allen-Bradley cable:

A-B 1784-CAS, 25-pin male modem connector

The cable has the following wiring: controller

(9-pin female)

DCD 1

2 RXD

TXD

DTR

3

4

COMMON

DSR

RTS

CTS

7

8

5

6

4

5

7

6

3

2 modem

(25-pin male)

8

20

B. Configure the modems:

Configure this signal:

DSR

DCD (CD)

DTR

To: be on (high) when a modem connection exists be on (high) whenever the modem receives the carrier from the remote modem hang-up when the controller changes the DTR signal from on to off (E.g., Set DTR to normal, not override.)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure Dial-Up Communications 23-3

Step 2: Configure the Serial

Port of the Controller

A. Open the RSLogix 5000

project for the controller.

42376

B. Right-click Controller name_of_controller and select

Properties.

C. Click the Serial Port tab.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

42251

D. Select System (default).

E. Select the settings for your DF1 network.

F. Select Full Duplex.

G. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the RTS signal turns on (high) and the time that data is sent. For example, a value of 4 produces an 80 ms delay.

H. Type the amount of delay (20 ms units) between the time that the last character is sent and the time that the RTS signal turns off (low).

I. Click Apply.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

23-4 Configure Dial-Up Communications

K.

J. Click the System Protocol tab.

L.

M.

K. Select DF1 Point to Point (Default).

L. Select the error detection method that your equipment uses.

M. Do you want to receive duplicate messages?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the Enable Duplicate Detection selected.

Clear the Enable Duplicate Detection check box.

N. Click OK.

42392

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure Dial-Up Communications 23-5

Step 3: Dial the Other

Controller

Use the following logic to dial another controller:

When condition turns on, the AWA instruction commands the modem to dial a remote controller.

The GSV instruction monitors the status of the serial port.

condition AWA

ASCII Write Append

Channel

Source

0 modem_number[0]

SerialPort Control

String Length

Characters Sent modem_dial

0

0

EN

DN

ER Dest

GSV

Get System Value

CIP Object Class DF1

CIP Object Name

Attribute Name DiagnosticCounters serial_port[0]

42393

Where: condition modem_number

String Length serial_port

Is: condition in your that initiates the dial-up sequence array of SINTs that contains the string of ASCII characters that tell the modem to dial a specific telephone number

0 , which means to send all the characters in modem_number array of 19 INTs (INT[19]) that stores the status of the serial port

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

23-6 Configure Dial-Up Communications

Step 4: Send the Message A. Enter the following logic:

Serial_port [1] contains the status of the modem signals. When bit 3 is on (DCD is high), the modem is receiving the carrier from the remote modem and communication is established. At this point, the message is sent to the remote controller.

serial_port[1].3

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

42387

Where: serial_port message

Is: array of 19 INTs (INT[19]) that stores the status of the serial port tag that controls the execution of the message

(MESSAGE data type)

B. If your message is to a PLC-5

®

or SLC 500

controller and it reads or writes integers (not REALs), use a buffer of INTs in the message.

ControlLogix controllers execute more efficiently and use less memory when working with 32-bit integers (DINTs). Use the

DINT data type for integers whenever possible.

PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers require 16-bit integers.

Use an INT buffer in the message and move the data into or out of the buffer as required.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure Dial-Up Communications 23-7

The following examples show how to use a buffer of INTs

EXAMPLE

Read integers from a PLC-5 controller

When serial_port[1].3 turns on, reads 16-bit integer values (INTs) and stores them in

int_buffer. Then the FAL instruction moves the values to dint_array. This converts the values to 32-bit integers (DINTs), for use by other instructions in the ControlLogix controller.

serial_port[1].3

message.EN

/

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER message.DN

fal_control

RES

FAL

File Arith/Logical

Control

Length

Position

Mode fal_control

?

0 all dint_array[fal_control.pos] Dest

Expression int_buffer[fal_control.pos]

EN

DN

ER

EXAMPLE

Write integers to a PLC-5 controller

When serial_port[1].3 turns on, moves the values in dint_array to int_buffer. This converts the values to 16-bit integers (INTs). Then the message instruction sends

int_buffer to the other controller.

serial_port[1].3

fal_control

RES

FAL

EN

DN

ER fal_control.DN

message.EN

/

Where: dint_array int_buffer

MSG

Type - Unconfigured

Message Control message ...

EN

DN

ER

Is an: array of DINTs that are used in the ControlLogix controller array of INTs with the same number of elements as dint_array

42387

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

23-8 Configure Dial-Up Communications

Step 5: Configure the

Message

A. In the MSG instruction, click ... .

B. Select a configuration for the message:

Table 23.A Message to a ControlLogix or FlexLogix controller

If the data is: structure (s)

And you want to: read (receive) the data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element not structure (s) write (send) the data

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element read (receive) the data Message Type

Source Element write (send) the data

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

CIP Data Table Read first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

CIP Data Table Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer first element of the tag for the data in the other controller

PLC5 Typed Read

@ name where: name is the first element of the tag that contains data in the other controller.

number of elements to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of elements to transfer

@ name where: name is the first element of the tag for the data in the other controller.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure Dial-Up Communications 23-9

Table 23.B Message to a PLC-5 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data write (send) data floating-point (REAL) read (receive) data write (send) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

PLC5 Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., N7:10)

PLC5 Typed Read data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

PLC5 Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the PLC-5 controller (e.g., F8:0)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

23-10 Configure Dial-Up Communications

Table 23.C Message to a SLC 500 controller

If the data is: integer (s)

And you want to: read (receive) data floating-point (REAL) write (send) data read (receive) data

For this item:

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag

Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Message Type

Source Element

Number Of Elements

Destination Tag write (send) data Message Type

Source Tag

Number Of Elements

Destination Element

Type or select:

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10) number of integers to transfer first element of int_buffer

SLC Typed Write first element of int_buffer number of integers to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., N7:10)

SLC Typed Read data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0) number of values to transfer first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller for the data

SLC Typed Write first element of the tag (controller-scoped) in this controller that contains the data number of values to transfer data table address in the SLC 500 controller (e.g., F8:0)

C. Click the Communication tab.

D. In the Path box, type the following path:

2,0

Since dial-up communications are point-to-point, the actual address of the controller is not required.

E. Leave the communication method at the default settings of:

CIP

Cache Connections (This check box does not apply to messages from the serial port.)

F. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Configure Dial-Up Communications 23-11

Step 6: Hang-Up Enter the following logic to hang-up:

After the remote controller receives the message ( message .DN is on), the AHL turns off the DTR line, which causes the modem to hang up.

message.DN

AHL

ASCII Handshake Lines

Channel

AND Mask

OR Mask 0

SerialPort Control modem_hangup_1

Channel Status(Decimal) 0

0

1

EN

DN

ER

After the modem hangs up ( modem_hangup_1 .EM is on), the AHL instruction turns on the DTR line, which readies the modem for the next call.

modem_hangup_1.EM

ASCII Handshake Lines

Channel

AND Mask

AHL

OR Mask

SerialPort Control

Channel Status(Decimal)

1 modem_hangup_2

0

0

0

EN

DN

ER

42393

Where: message

Is: tag that controls the execution of the message

(MESSAGE data type) modem_hangup_1 tag that controls the execution of the AHL

(SERIAL_PORT_CONTROL data type) modem_hangup_2 tag that controls the execution of the AHL

(SERIAL_PORT_CONTROL data type)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

23-12 Configure Dial-Up Communications

Step 7: Stagger the

Messages

As you add messages to your project, you may have to coordinate the execution of the messages. To avoid errors and assure that each message is processed, follow these rules:

Rule 1: Enable no more than 16 messages at one time (including block transfers).

Rule 2: Enable no more than 10 of the following types of messages at one time:

CIP data table reads or writes that are not cached

CIP generic

PLC2, PLC3, PLC5, or SLC (all types)

• block transfer reads or writes that are not cached

If the number of messages in your application exceeds rules 1 and 2, then stagger the execution of your messages. Here are some options:

Send each message in sequence

Send the messages in groups that are within the limits of rules 1 and 2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

24

Program Motion Control

When to Use This

Procedure

RSLogix5000 Software

Axis

Configuration

Integrated

Motion

Programming

The ControlLogix controller, 1756-M02AE servo module or

1756-M08SE SERCOS module, and RSLogix 5000

software create an integrated motion control system.

ControlLogix Controller

Program Execution

1756-M02AE Servo Module

Drive

Position Velocity

Motor

Feedback

Position Velocity

Drive

Motor

Feedback

Motion Trajectory Planner

Position Velocity

1756-M08SE SERCOS Module

SERCOS Drive

Position Velocity

Motor

Feedback

The ControlLogix controller contains a high-speed motion task, which executes motion requests from the routines and generates position and velocity profile information. Each ControlLogix controller controls up to 16 1756-M02AE or 1756-M08SE modules.

The 1756-M02AE servo module connects to a servo drive and closes a high-speed position and velocity loop. Each

1756-M02AE module controls up to two axes.

The 1756-M08SE SERCOS module connects to one or more

SERCOS drives and controls up to 8 axes. Each SERCOS drive closes a high-speed position and velocity loop.

RSLogix 5000 software provides complete axis configuration and motion programming support.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-2 Program Motion Control

How to Use This Procedure To program motion control:

Select a CST Master Device

Add the Motion Module

1756-M08SE - Add the SERCOS Drive

Create a Motion Group

Assign the Properties of the Motion Group

Configure the Axis

Run Hookup Tests

Develop Logic for Motion Control

For more information, see the ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and

Configuration Manual, publication 1756-UM006.

Select a CST Master Device If your controller uses a motion axis, you must define a device in the chassis as a coordinated system time (CST) master. This synchronizes all servo modules and controllers in the chassis to the same system clock.

IMPORTANT

Only one device in a chassis can be the CST master.

You have the following options:

Define the Controller as the CST Master

or

Define a 1756-SYNCH Module as the CST Master

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Program Motion Control 24-3

Define the Controller as the CST Master

1. In the controller organizer, right-click the Controller folder and select Properties.

2. Click the Date/Time tab.

3. Is another controller in the chassis the CST master?

If:

No

Yes

Then:

Select the Make this controller the master check box.

Clear the Make this controller the master check box.

4. Click OK.

Define a 1756-SYNCH Module as the CST Master

1. In the controller organizer, right-click the 1756-SYNCH module and choose Properties.

2. Click the Time Mastership tab.

3. Select this check box.

4. Choose OK.

43085

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-4 Program Motion Control

Add the Motion Module

1. Open the RSLogix 5000

project offline.

+

+

+

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Trends

Data Types

I/O Configuration 1. Right-click and select New

Module.

2. Select the your type of motion module and choose OK.

3.

4.

5.

42377

3. Type a name for the module.

4. Type or select the slot number where the module is installed

5. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

6. Choose Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Program Motion Control 24-5

7.

8.

42398

7. Initially, do you want to the module to communicate with the controller?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Select the check box.

EXAMPLE

Inhibit a module

Use the Inhibit Module check box to make it easier to test a system:

Initially, inhibit the module.

When you are ready to test the devices that are associated with the module, clear the check box.

8. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

9. Choose Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-6 Program Motion Control

1756-M02AE

11.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

10.

10. Choose New Axis.

11. Type a name for the axis and choose OK.

12. Assign the axis to a channel (the physical connection on the servo module to which the axis is wired).

13. Repeat steps 10 - 12 for the other channel, if required.

14. Choose Finish.

43031

1756-M08SE

15.

16.

43017

15. How many axes are connected to this module? (In the next section, you associate the axes with the module.)

If this number of axes:

1 - 4

5 - 8

Then select a Cycle Time of:

1

2

16. Select the intensity of the light beam on the fiber optic cable. For cables that span long distances or cables that are low quality, select High.

17. Choose Finish.

Program Motion Control 24-7

1756-M08SE - Add the

SERCOS Drive

+

+

+

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Trends

Data Types

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-M08SE 1. Right-click and select New

Module.

2. Select the SERCOS drive and choose OK.

3.

4.

5.

3. Type a name for the drive.

4. Type or select the node number of the drive. If this is a multi-axis drive, select the node number of the first axis.

5. How closely must any module in this slot match the information on this tab?

If this information must match: all, including minor revision number all except the minor revision number none

Then select

Exact Match

Compatible Module

Disable Keying

6. Choose Next.

43018

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-8 Program Motion Control

8.

42398

7. If communication with the module fails, how do you want the controller to respond?

ATTENTION

!

If communication with a module fails, the controller operates on old data from the module. To avoid potential injury or damage, either monitor communications with modules or configure modules to produce a major fault if communications fail.

If you want the controller to: fault (major fault) continue operating

Then:

Select the check box.

Leave the check box cleared (unchecked).

Notes:

Monitor the connection using ladder logic.

8. Choose Next.

43019

11.

9.

9. Choose New Axis.

10. Type a name for the tag for this node (axis) and choose OK.

11. Select the name of the tag from step 10.

12. If this is a multi-axis drive, repeat steps 9 - 11 for each axis.

13. Choose Next.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Program Motion Control 24-9

43024

14.

14. Which type of bus regulator does this drive use?

If: external internal

Then select: catalog number of the regulator

Internal none <none>

15. Choose Finish.

Create a Motion Group

+

+

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Ungrouped Axes name_of_axis

Trends

Data Types

I/O Configuration

[x] 1756-M08SE

1. Right-click and select New

Motion Group.

2. Type a name for the group and choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-10 Program Motion Control

Assign the Properties of the

Motion Group

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Name_of_New_Group

Ungrouped Axes name_of_axis

Trends

1. Right-click and select

Motion Group Properties.

2.

43025

2. Select the axis.

3. Choose Add -->.

3.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Program Motion Control 24-11

4.

5.

6.

43026

4. Click the Attribute tab.

5. Type or select the rate at which you want the controller to update the axes that are assigned to this group.

For a 1756-M08SE module, set the Coarse Update Period to a multiple of the Cycle Time.

6. Do you want to monitor any of the following members of an axis of this group directly via its tag? (A GSV instruction always lets you access these values regardless of this selection.)

ActualAcceleration

ActualPosition

ActualVelocity

AverageVelocity

CommandAcceleration

CommandPosition

CommandVelocity

MasterOffset

If:

Yes

Then select:

Enabled

Notes:

This increases the motion execution time of the

controller. Refer to Estimate Execution Time of a

Motion Action on page B-28.

No Disabled

7. Choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-12 Program Motion Control

Configure the Axis To configure an axis:

Display the Properties for the Axis

Select an Axis Configuration

Assign Units for Measurements

Assign a Conversion Constant

1756-M02AE - Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive

1756-M08SE - Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier

1756-M08SE - Select the Motor and Feedback

Display the Properties for the Axis

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Name_of_New_Group name_of_axis

Ungrouped Axes

Trends

Right-click and select Axis

Properties.

Select an Axis Configuration

Select the type of axis that you want.

43033

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Program Motion Control 24-13

Assign Units for Measurements

1.

2.

43027

1. Click the Units tab.

2. Type the units in which you want to program, such as revs, degrees, inches, or millimeters.

Assign a Conversion Constant

1.

2.

3.

1. Click the Conversion tab.

2. Select the type of axis positioning that you want to use.

3. Type the counts per unit.

43028

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-14 Program Motion Control

1756-M02AE - Select the Configuration of the Servo Drive

1.

2.

3.

43032

1. Click the Servo tab.

2. Select the configuration of the servo drive.

3. Optional: Select the two attributes of the AXIS object that you want to access via either a GSV instruction or tag name.

4. Choose OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Program Motion Control 24-15

1756-M08SE - Select the Catalog Number of the Amplifier

1.

2.

3.

43029

1. Click the Drive tab.

2. Select the catalog number of the amplifier.

3. Optional: Select the two attributes of the AXIS object that you want to access via either a GSV instruction or tag name.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-16 Program Motion Control

1756-M08SE - Select the Motor and Feedback

1.

2.

3.

1. Click the Motor/Feedback tab.

2. Select the catalog number of the motor.

3. In step 2, did you select a catalog number?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Go to step 4.

Select the type of feedback.

4. Choose OK.

43030

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Run Hookup Tests

Program Motion Control 24-17

ATTENTION

!

These tests may cause an axis to move even with the controller in program mode. After you complete the

Test Output & Feedback test, do not change the polarity. This may cause an axis-runaway condition.

To run the hookup diagnostics for an axis:

Download Your Project and Go Online

Display the Properties for the Axis

Complete the Hookup Tests

Download Your Project and Go Online

1. Create and configure all the motion modules and axes.

2. Save your project

3. Download your project..

4. Verify that a connection is established with each module in the

I/O configuration of the controller.

5. For each SERCOS drive, make sure that the drive goes to Step 4.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-18 Program Motion Control

2.

Display the Properties for the Axis

+

+

Controller

Tasks

Motion Groups

Name_of_New_Group name_of_axis

Ungrouped Axes

Trends

Right-click and select Axis

Properties.

Complete the Hookup Tests

1.

3.

43034

1. Click the Hookup tab.

2. Type number of increments that the axis moves during each test.

3. Select each test and follow the prompts.

4. When you finish the hookup tests, choose OK.

For more information about hookup diagnostics, see the ControlLogix

Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual, publication

1756-UM006.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Program Motion Control 24-19

Develop Logic for Motion

Control

To write a motion application program, you can insert motion instructions directly into your ladder logic program.

The motion instructions operate on one or more axes. You must identify and configure axes before you can use them. For more information about configuring axes, see the ControlLogix Motion

Module Setup and Configuration Manual, publication 1756-UM006.

For more information on individual motion instructions, see the

Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM007.

Each motion instruction has an operand named Motion control. This field uses a MOTION_INSTRUCTION tag to store status information during the execution of motion instructions. This status information can include instruction status, errors, etc.

The

Motion control operand

ATTENTION

!

Tags used for the motion control operand of motion instruction should only be used once. Re-use of the same motion control operand in other instructions can cause unintended operation of the control variables.

For more information about the MOTION_INSTRUCTION tag, refer to the appropriate motion instruction in the Logix5000 Controllers

Motion Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM007.

You can read motion status and configuration parameters in your logic using two methods.

Method:

Directly accessing the MOTION_GROUP and AXIS structures

Using the GSV instruction

Enable the Auto Tag Update attribute for a motion group

Example:

Axis faults

Motion status

Actual position

CommandAcceleration

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-20 Program Motion Control

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

In your ladder logic program, you can modify motion configuration parameters using the SSV instruction. For example, you can change position loop gain, velocity loop gain, and current limits within your program.

For more information on the SSV instruction, see the following publications:

Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003

ControlLogix Motion Module Setup and Configuration Manual, publication 1756-UM006

Handle Motion Faults

Two types of motion faults exist.

Type

Errors

Minor/Major

Description

Do not impact controller operation

Should be correct to optimize execution time and ensure program accuracy

Caused by a problem with the servo loop

Can shutdown the controller if you do not correct the fault condition

Example

A Motion Axis Move

(MAM) instruction with a parameter out of range

The application exceeded the

PositionErrorTolerance value.

You can configure a fault as either minor or major by using the Axis

Wizard-Group window.

Understanding errors

Executing a motion instruction within an application program can generate errors. The MOTION_INSTRUCTION tag has a field that contains the error code. For more information about error codes for individual instructions, see the Logix5000 Controllers Motion

Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM007.

Understanding minor/major faults

Several faults can occur that are not caused by motion instructions.

For example, a loss of encoder feedback or an actual position exceeding an overtravel limit will cause faults. The motion faults are considered type 2 faults with error codes from 1 to 32. See Logix5000

Controllers Common Procedures, publication 1756-PM001.

Program Motion Control 24-21

The following figure shows several rungs of a motion control application program.

Rung 0:

Enables the Feed and Cut axes when you press the servo_on button.

Rung 1:

Jogs the Feed axis in the positive direction when you press the jog_plus button.

Rung 2:

Jogs the Feed axis in the reverse direction when you press the jog_minus button.

Rung 3:

Stops the Feed axis when you release with the jog_plus button or the jog_minus button.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

24-22 Program Motion Control

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Chapter

25

Maintain the 1756-BA1 Battery

When to Use This

Procedure

How to Use This Procedure To complete this procedure, do the following steps:

Estimate Battery Life

Store Replacement Batteries

Replace a Battery

Estimate Battery Life

Use this procedure to ensure that the 1756-BA1 battery has sufficient capacity to maintain the memory of the controller and that the battery does not leak.

When the battery is about 95 percent discharged, the controller provides the following warnings:

On the front of the controller, the BAT LED turns on (solid red).

A minor fault occurs (type 10, code 10).

To prevent the battery from leaking potentially dangerous chemicals, replace the battery at least as often as indicated in the following attention:

ATTENTION

!

To prevent possible battery leakage, even if the BAT

LED is off, replace a battery according to the following schedule:

Replace the battery within: If the temperature 1 in. below the chassis is:

0° to 35° C

36° to 40° C

41° to 45° C

46° to 50° C

51° to 55° C

56° to 60° C

No required replacement

3 years

2 years

16 months

11 months

8 months

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

25-2 Maintain the 1756-BA1 Battery

To estimate how long the battery will support the memory of the controller:

A. Determine the temperature (° C) 1 in. below the chassis.

B. Determine the percentage of time that the controller is powered off per week.

EXAMPLE

Determine the percentage of time that the controller is powered off per week

If a controller is off:

8 hr/day during a 5-day work week

• all day Saturday and Sunday

Then the controller is off 52% of the time:

1. total hours per week = 7 x 24 +168 hours

2. total off hours per week = (5 days x 8 hr/day) + Saturday + Sunday = 88 hours

3. percentage off time = 88/168 = 52%

C. Using “Table 25.A Worst-case estimates of battery life” on page 25-3, determine the estimated worst-case battery life before

and after the BAT LED turns on.

D. For each year of battery life, decrease the time before the BAT

LED turns on by the percentage that is shown in the table. (Do not decrease the time after the BAT LED turns on.)

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Maintain the 1756-BA1 Battery 25-3

IMPORTANT

If the BAT LED turns on when you apply power to the controller, the battery life may be less then the table below indicates. Some of the battery life may have been used up while the controller was off and unable to turn on the BAT LED.

Table 25.A Worst-case estimates of battery life

Controller: Temperature: Time before BAT LED turns on:

Power off 100% Power off 50%

1756-L1

1756-L1M1

1756-L1M2

1756-L1M3

1756-L55M12

1756-L55M13

1756-L55M14

1756-L55M16

0° C

60° C

25° C

0° C

60° C

25° C

0° C

60° C

60° C

25° C

0° C

60° C

25° C

0° C

60° C

25° C

8 months

18.5 months

20.2 months

5.6 months

13.6 months

16.8 months

4 months

11.7 months

16.0 months

2.6 months

9.1 months

14.4 months

57 days

63 days

60 days

29 days

25° C

0° C

60° C

25° C

30 days

24 days

15 days

13 days

61 days

48 days

30 days

27 days

0° C 6 days 12 days

Use the values for the 1756-L55M13 controller.

8 months

30.5 months

33.7 months

8 months

22.9 months

27.9 months

7.4 months

20.1 months

26.6 months

4.9 months

16.2 months

24.4 months

110 days

123 days

118 days

57 days

1756-L55M22

1756-L55M23

1756-L55M24 Use the values for the 1756-L55M14 controller.

17%

23%

17%

17%

23%

17%

36%

16%

16%

23%

17%

24%

16%

16%

24%

Yearly decrease:

24%

16%

16%

24%

16%

16%

Time after BAT LED turns on and then power off 100%:

24 days

4 days

14 days

22 days

69 hours

76 hours

73 hours

35 hours

16 days

28 days

31 days

8 days

20 days

25 days

6 days

18 days

37 hours

30 hours

18 hours

16 hours

7 hours

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

25-4 Maintain the 1756-BA1 Battery

Store Replacement

Batteries

Because a battery may leak potentially dangerous chemicals if stored improperly, store batteries as follows:

ATTENTION

!

Store batteries in a cool, dry environment. We recommend 25° C with 40% to 60% relative humidity.

You may store batteries for up to 30 days between

-45° to 85° C, such as during transportation. To avoid possible leakage, do not store batteries above 60° C for more than 30 days.

Replace a Battery Because the controller uses a lithium battery, you must follow specific precautions when handling or disposing a battery.

ATTENTION

!

The controller uses a lithium battery, which contains potentially dangerous chemicals. Before handling or disposing a battery, review Guidelines for Handling

Lithium Batteries, publication AG-5.4.

A. Turn on the chassis power.

B. Does the existing battery show signs of leakage or damage?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Before handling the battery, review Guidelines for Handling Lithium

Batteries , publication AG-5.4.

Go the next step.

C. Remove the old battery.

top middle bottom no connection black lead (-) red lead (+)

30167

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Maintain the 1756-BA1 Battery 25-5

D. Install a new 1756-BA1 battery.

ATTENTION

!

Only install a 1756-BA1 battery. If you install a different battery, you may damage the controller.

E. On the front of the controller, is the BAT LED off?

If:

Yes

No

Then:

Go the next step.

1. Check that the battery is correctly connected to the controller.

2. If the BAT LED remains on, install another 1756-BA1 battery.

3. If the BAT LED remains on after you complete Step 2.,

contact your Rockwell Automation representative or local distributor.

battery label

41025

F. Attach the battery label:

1. Write on the battery label the date you install the battery.

2. Attach the label to the inside of the controller door.

G. Dispose the old battery according to state and local regulations.

ATTENTION

!

Do not incinerate or dispose lithium batteries in general trash collection. They may explode or rupture violently. Follow state and local regulations for disposal of these materials. You are legally responsible for hazards created while your battery is being disposed.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

25-6 Maintain the 1756-BA1 Battery

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

When To Use This

Procedure

Map an Address

Appendix

A

Map a PLC/SLC Address

Use this procedure if you are sending a message from a PLC-5

®

or

SLC 500

controller to a ControlLogix controller and the PLC/SLC controller does not support Logical ASCII addressing.

To use a logical address (e.g., N7:0) to specify a value (tag) in a

ControlLogix controller, you must map files to tags:

You only have to map the file numbers that are used in messages; the other file numbers do not need to be mapped.

The mapping table is loaded into the controller and is used whenever a “logical” address accesses data.

You can only access controller-scoped tags (global data).

1. In RSLogix 5000

software, open the project file for the controller whose data you want to access.

2. From the Logic menu, select Map PLC/SLC Messages.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

A-2 Map a PLC/SLC Address

3.a.

3.b.

4.

42260

3. For each file that is referenced in a PLC-5 or SLC command, make a map entry: a. Type the file number of the logical address.

b. Type or select the controller-scoped (global) tag that supplies or receives data for the file number. (You can map multiple files to the same tag.)

4. For PLC-2 commands, specify the tag that supplies or receives the data.

5. Click OK.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Appendix

B

Estimate Execution Time

When to Use This

Procedure

Use this appendix to estimate the time required for the execution of: instructions and motion tasks.

To:

Estimate Execution Time of a Ladder Instruction

Estimate Execution Time of a Function Block Routine

Estimate Execution Time of a Motion Action

See page:

B-1

B-23

B-28

Times are for a ControlLogix controller (Cat. No. 1756-L1, -L1Mx,

-L55Mxx) and RSLogix 5000

software.

IMPORTANT

Use this information to select among different programming options. Actual execution times may vary because of the configuration of your project and the version of RSLogix 5000 software that you are using.

Estimate Execution Time of a Ladder Instruction

1. From Table B.2 on page B-3, find the base time for the

instruction.

2. To the base time of the instruction, add time for expressions, subscripts, and data conversions:

If an operand: contains an expression

Then add time for: each operation in the expression.

For each operation, use the time for the corresponding instruction.

the calculation of the array subscript

Using this table:

Table B.2 on page B-3

Table B.4 on page B-22

is an element of an array and one or more of the subscripts is a tag

(e.g., tag_c[tag_d] ) is converted by sign-extension contains a SINT or INT tag in an array subscript the data conversion the conversion of the SINT or INT to a DINT

Table B.1 on page B-3

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-2 Estimate Execution Time

Examples:

Instruction:

CMP ( tag_a * tag_b / 100)

* (MUL)

/ (DIV)

Data Type:

REAL

REAL

ADD

Source A

Source B

Destination

ADD

Source A

DINT

REAL

REAL

DINT[0,DINT]

Execution Time:

4.3

µ s overhead

18.0

µ s for the MUL operation

18.8

µ s for the DIV operation

41.1

µ s total

10.8

µ s for the ADD instruction

8.5

µ s for DINT to REAL conversion

19.3

µ s total

10.8

µ s for the ADD instruction

25.5

µ s for array subscript

8.5

µ s for DINT to REAL conversion of array element

Source B

Destination

MUL

Source A

Source B

Destination

REAL

REAL

REAL

DINT

DINT

44.8

µ s total

18.0

µ s for MUL instruction

8.5

µ s for DINT to REAL conversion

12.4

µ s for REAL to DINT conversion

38.9

µ s total

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Estimate Execution Time B-3

Table B.1 Sign-Extension Conversion Times

To convert a: To a: Requires (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx

DINT

DINT

DINT

INT

INT

REAL

REAL

REAL

SINT

SINT

INT

REAL

SINT

DINT

REAL

DINT

INT

SINT

DINT

REAL

1.9

12.4

15.0

14.9

7.4

8.1

7.3

1.2

1.0

1.7

11.8

11.7

1.0

1.7

6.0

1.1

1.9

9.8

1756-L55Mx

6.1

6.5

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx

AFI

AHL

AND

ARD

ARL

ASN

ATN

ACL

ACS

ADD

ADD

ABL

ABS

ABS

ACB n/a n/a

DINT n/a n/a

REAL

REAL n/a

DINT

REAL n/a n/a

REAL

DINT

REAL

0.1

92.2

0.57

76.8

77.0

263.1

224.7

13.7

0.61

0.88

13.2

126.5

272.5

0.57

10.8

0.55

10.4

0.1

71.8

0.55

60.1

60.2

241.8

213.2

1756-L55Mxx

11.4

0.61

0.87

10.9

98.7

250.5

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-4 Estimate Execution Time

COP

COP

COP

COP

COS

CPS

CPS

CPS

CPS

CPT

CTD

CTU

DDT 0 mismatches

DDT 1 mismatches

DDT 2 mismatches

DEG

DELETE

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx 1756-L55Mxx

AVE

AVE

AVE

AVE

AWA

AWT

BSL

BSR n/a n/a

DINT

DINT

SINT

INT

DINT

REAL

54.4

+ (x * 6.6)

54.5

+ (x * 7.0)

53.9

+ (x * 6.5)

44.0

+ (x * 14.7)

47.0

+ (x * 5.8)

47.0

+ (x * 6.1)

46.8

+ (x * 5.7)

38.7

+ (x * 13.6)

79.5

79.6

61.7

61.8

7.9

+ ( (x /32) * 0.8) 6.4

+ ( (x /32) * 0.6)

8.7

+ ( (x /32) * 0.8) 7.0

+ ( (x /32) * 0.6)

BTD

CLR

CLR

CMP

CONCAT

DINT

DINT

REAL n/a

12.7

0.35

0.40

4.31

10.7

+ (x * 1.4)

10.5

0.34

0.39

3.6

9.1

+ (x * 1.1)

Notes: x = Length x = Length

Round up x /32 to a whole number.

x = number of characters in Source A + number of characters in Source B x = Length SINT

INT

DINT

REAL

REAL

SINT

INT

6.9

+ (x * 0.1)

6.7

+ (x * 0.2)

7.1

+ (x * 0.3)

7.1

+ (x * 0.3)

222.9

15.4

+ (x * 0.1)

15.2

+ (x * 0.2)

DINT

REAL

15.7

+ (x * 0.3)

15.7

+ (x * 0.3) n/a 4.8

COUNTER 0.43

COUNTER 0.43

DINT 13.1

+ (x * 1.4)

DINT

DINT

27.9

41.6

+ (x * 1.4)

+ (x * 1.4)

REAL n/a

18.8

10.6

+ (x * 1.6)

6.5

+ (x * 0.1)

6.2

+ (x * 0.2)

6.6

+ (x * 0.3)

6.6

+ (x * 0.3)

208.3

13.8

+ (x * 0.1)

13.4

+ (x * 0.2)

13.9

+ (x * 0.3)

13.9

+ (x * 0.3)

4.0

0.42

0.42

10.6

+ (x * 1.0)

21.6

+ (x * 1.0)

31.6

+ (x * 1.0)

18.2

8.9

+ (x * 1.2) x = Length x = number of bits to compare

Based on ALL mode x = number of characters in Source A + number of characters in Source B

DIV

DIV

DINT

REAL

11.0

18.8

10.5

18.2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Estimate Execution Time B-5

FLL

FLL

FLL

FLL

FOR

FRD

FSC

GEQ

GEQ

GRT

GRT

GSV

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx 1756-L55Mxx

DTOS n/a

DTR

EQU

EQU

FAL

DINT

DINT

REAL n/a

65.5

+ (1.4 * d) + (0.7

* x)

2.9

0.38

41.5

2.4

0.4

+ (0.6 * d) + (0.6

* x)

0.38

0.4

10.3

+ (x * (4.0 + e) 9.77

+ (x * (3.8 + e)

Notes: d = number of digits in Source x = number of characters in Destination x = number of elements manipulated in one scan

FFU

FFU

FFU

FFU

FIND

FFL

FFL

FFL

FFL

FBC 0 mismatches

FBC 1 mismatches

FBC 2 mismatches

DINT

REAL

DINT

REAL n/a

SINT

INT

DINT

REAL

DINT n/a n/a

SINT

INT

DINT

REAL n/a

DINT

DINT

DINT

13.2

+ (x * 1.4)

26.6

+ (x * 1.4)

39.0

+ (x * 1.4)

SINT 9.8

INT 10.9

DINT

REAL

10.2

10.2

11.1

+ (x * 0.6)

12.1

+ (x * 1.0)

12.5

+ (x * 0.6)

12.5

+ (x * 0.6)

8.0

+ (1.8 * x) + (1.3

* (r - s + 1))

8.0

8.8

8.3

8.3

10.7

+ (x * 1.0)

20.6

+ (x * 1.0)

29.7

+ (x * 1.0)

8.9

+ (x * 0.5)

9.7

+ (x * 0.8)

9.9

+ (x * 0.4)

9.9

+ (x * 0.4)

6.7

+ (1.4 * x) + (r - s

+ 1) e = time for the operators in the expression x x

= number of bits to compare

Based on ALL mode

= Length x = number of characters in Search r = Result s = Start x = Length 4.5

+ (x * 0.2)

4.7

+ (x * 0.2)

5.3

+ (x * 0.2)

4.1

+ (x * 0.3)

4.3

+ (x * 0.3)

4.9

+ (x * 0.2)

5.3

+ (x * 0.2)

15.8

+ (x * 7.3)

4.9

+ (x * 0.2)

12.6

+ (x * 6.0)

9.0

6.9

10.8

+ (x * (3.9 + e) 10.15 + (x * (3.7 + e) x x

= Terminal value/Step size

= number of elements manipulated in one scan e = time for the operators in the expression

0.38

0.59

0.38

0.59

See Table B.3 on page B-10

0.6

0.4

0.6

0.4

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-6 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx 1756-L55Mxx

INSERT n/a 13.8

+ (x * 1.3) 11.0

+ (x * 1.0)

LFU

LFU

LFU

LIM

LFL

LFL

LFL

LFU

LEQ

LES

LES

LFL

JSR/SBR

JSR/SBR

LBL

LEQ

JMP

JSR (no parameters) n/a

JSR/RET

JSR/RET

SINT

INT

JSR/RET

JSR/RET

JSR/SBR

JSR/SBR

DINT

REAL

SINT

INT

1.6

10.8

21.0

20.9

20.9

20.9

21.5

21.5

+ (x * 3.8)

+ (x * 4.2)

+ (x * 3.6)

+ (x * 3.6)

+ (x * 3.8)

+ (x * 4.2)

DINT

REAL

DINT

REAL

DINT

REAL

SINT

INT 10.9

DINT 10.2

0.59

0.38

0.59

9.8

21.6

+ (x * 3.6)

21.5

+ (x * 3.6)

0.2

0.38

REAL

SINT

10.2

12.0

INT 13.4

DINT 14.3

LIM

LN

LOG

LOWER

REAL

DINT

REAL

REAL

REAL n/a

14.2

0.81

3.55

192.9

193.3

7.5

+ (x * 1.4)

MAAT n/a

MAG n/a

MAH (switch/marker) n/a

MAJ n/a

173

862

70

227

110

523

48

107

1.2

10.2

20.2

+ (x * 3.7)

20.1

+ (x * 4.1)

20.2

+ (x * 3.5)

20.2

+ (x * 3.5)

20.8

+ (x * 3.7)

20.7

+ (x * 4.1)

0.6

0.4

0.6

8.0

20.9

+ (x * 3.5)

20.7

+ (x * 3.5)

0.20

0.4

10.7

11.2

11.2

0.8

8.8

8.3

8.3

9.7

2.9

181.9

182.3

6.4

+ (x * 1.1)

Notes: x = number of characters in Source A + number of characters in Source B x = number of parameters

The time is for the JSR/RET pair.

x = number of parameters

The time is for the JSR/SBR pair.

x = number of characters in Source A + number of characters in Source B

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Estimate Execution Time B-7

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx 1756-L55Mxx

MAJ (w/ merge) n/a

MAM n/a

MAM (w/ merge)

MAPC n/a n/a

MAR

MAS (all w/ move and jog running)

MAS (individual motion types)

MASD n/a n/a n/a n/a

MASR n/a

MATC n/a

MAW

MCCP (cubic)

MCCP (linear)

MCD

MCR

MDR

MDW

MEQ

MGPS (fast shutdown w/ move and jog running)

MGPS (fast stop w/ move and jog running)

MGPS (hard shutdown w/ move and jog running) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

DINT n/a

MGS (w/ move and jog running)

MGSD

MGSR

MID n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

110

135

40

149

161

518

178

84

0.1

146

136

0.59

65

394

471

665

479

168

331

69

58

70

62

67

10.2

+ (x * 1.6)

89

29

103

108

304

105

62

0.1

97

90

0.6

43

247

263

349

295

109

205

71

43

44

53

42

43

8.5

+ (x * 1.3)

MOD

MOD

MOV

MOV

DINT

REAL

20.3

64.1

DINT-DINT 0.5

REAL-REAL 0.8

18.0

57.2

0.4

0.8

Notes: x = number of characters in Source A + number of characters in Source B

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-8 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx 1756-L55Mxx

NOP

NOT

ONS

OR

NEG

NEG

NEQ

NEQ

MRAT

MRP

MSF

MSG

MSO

MUL

MUL

MVM

OSF

OSR

OTE

OTL

OTU

PID (independent - slave mode)

PID (independent)

PID (ISA - dependent)

PID (manual mode)

PID (set output mode)

RAD

RES

RET (in FOR loop)

REAL

T,C or R n/a

RET (no parameters) n/a

RTO TIMER

RTOS - example 1

RTOS - example 2 n/a n/a

SBR (no parameters) n/a

DINT

REAL

DINT

REAL n/a

DINT

BOOL

DINT

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

DINT

REAL n/a

0.05

0.51

2.8

0.57

0.57

0.94

0.38

0.38

51

9.6

18.0

11.6

45

89

154

163.6

3.4

3.7

0.2

0.2

0.2

378.6

356.5

425.5

311.0

311.0

18.4

0.32

4.6

4.1

0.43

816.8

1045

4.8

328.0

394.1

284.2

284.2

17.8

0.32

4.5

3.9

0.42

473.9

611.5

4.6

0.05

0.49

2.6

0.55

0.55

0.92

0.4

0.4

35

9.2

17.4

9.7

32

58

102

119.9

2.9

3.1

0.2

0.2

0.2

349.1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Notes:

Source = 1234.5677

Source = 1.234

Estimate Execution Time B-9 n/a n/a

TIMER

TIMER

DINT

REAL n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

DINT

REAL

DINT

DINT

DINT

REAL

REAL n/a

SINT

INT

DINT

REAL n/a n/a

REAL

DINT

DINT

DINT

DINT

DINT

REAL

DINT

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx 1756-L55Mxx

TND

TOD

TOF

TON

TRN

TRN

UID

UIE

UPPER

STOR - example 1

STOR - example 2

SUB

SUB

SWPB (High/Low)

SWPB (Reverse)

SWPB (Word)

TAN

SQO

SQR

SQR

SRT

SIN

SIZE

SQI

SQL

SRT

SSV

STD

STD

STD

STD

STOD - example 1

STOD - example 2

594.8

569.5

0.57

10.7

6.7

5.5

5.9

289.8

0.002

15.0

0.32

0.43

13.1

21.2

37.9

37.3

7.8

+ (x * 1.4)

6.2

9.9

37.5

30.4

229.2

5.6

3.7

6.1

4.9

7.6

27.9

25.7

214.4

4.9

3.1

5.0

35.2

See Table B.3 on page B-10

29.3

106.9 + (x * 51.9)

113.4 + (x * 52.5)

87.1

93.3

+ (x * 47.9)

+ (x * 48.3)

113.3 + (x * 51.4)

115.1 + (x * 55.8)

79.0

53.6

93.4

95.8

56.3

36.6

+ (x * 47.5)

+ (x * 52.5)

353.1

333.7

0.55

10.3

5.3

4.7

4.9

272.3

0.01

11.4

0.31

0.42

10.2

16.7

27.9

27.5

6.4

+ (x * 1.1)

XIC BOOL 0.1

0.1

Notes:

Varies with the length and randomness of the numbers.

x = Length

Source = ABCDEFGH1234ABCDEFGH

Source = 1234

Source = ABCDEFGH1.234ABCDEFGH

Source = 1.234

x = number of characters in Source A + number of characters in Source B

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-10 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.2 Execution Times for Ladder Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Data type: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx 1756-L55Mxx

XIO

XOR

XPY

BOOL

DINT

REAL

0.1

0.57

500.4

0.1

0.54

450.0

Notes:

Actual time depends on the values of the operands.

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions

Object/Attribute: Instruction:

AXIS AccelerationCommand

AXIS AccelerationDataScaling

AXIS AccelerationDataScalingExp

AXIS AccelerationDataScalingFact

AXIS AccelerationFeedback

AXIS AccelerationFeedforwardGain

AXIS AccelerationFeedforwardGain

AXIS AccelerationLimitBipolar

AXIS AccelerationLimitBipolar

AXIS AccelerationLimitNegative

AXIS AccelerationLimitNegative

AXIS AccelerationLimitPositive

AXIS AccelerationLimitPositive

AXIS ActualAcceleration

AXIS ActualPosition

AXIS ActualVelocity

AXIS ATConfigurationList

AXIS AttributeErrorCode

AXIS AttributeErrorID

AXIS AuxFeedbackConfiguration

AXIS AuxFeedbackRatio

AXIS AuxFeedbackResolution

AXIS AuxFeedbackType

AXIS AuxPositionFeedback

AXIS AverageVelocity

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

39.8

60.0

59.8

59.7

88.1

36.0

128.7

36.0

128.7

36.3

36.9

36.4

39.8

38.5

130.4

36.0

128.7

36.8

37.3

36.2

36.6

36.6

34.8

39.8

121.1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

25.8

26.4

26.4

25.1

40.7

59.4

26.6

26.8

28.7

82.6

25.9

106.1

26.0

106.1

26.0

106.1

40.9

40.7

1756-L55MXX

28.7

25.9

26.0

26.2

28.6

27.7

107.5

Estimate Execution Time B-11

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS AverageVelocityTimebase

AXIS AverageVelocityTimebase

AXIS AxisConfigurationState

AXIS AxisControlBits

AXIS AxisEventBits

AXIS AxisFaultBits

AXIS AxisInfoSelect1

AXIS AxisInfoSelect1

AXIS AxisInfoSelect2

AXIS AxisInfoSelect2

AXIS AxisInstance

AXIS AxisResponseBits

AXIS AxisState

AXIS AxisStatusBits

AXIS AxisType

AXIS AxisType

AXIS BrakeEngageDelayTime

AXIS BrakeOffDelayTime

AXIS BrakeOnDelayTime

AXIS BrakeReleaseDelayTime

AXIS BusRegulatorCapacity

AXIS BusRegulatorID

AXIS C2CConnectionInstance

AXIS C2CMapInstance

AXIS CommandAcceleration

AXIS CommandPosition

AXIS CommandVelocity

AXIS ConversionConstant

AXIS ConversionConstant

AXIS DampingFactor

AXIS DampingFactor

AXIS DCBusVoltage

AXIS DriveAxisID

AXIS DriveCapacity

AXIS DriveFaultAction

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

59.9

60.2

59.7

40.9

126.4

38.5

130.5

37.2

37.2

36.8

40.3

40.4

128.7

35.6

36.0

128.7

36.2

37.2

28.2

38.5

130.4

34.4

108.8

24.2

40.1

36.3

123.7

40.6

130.7

28.8

39.1

40.1

40.0

38.5

130.4

29.2

29.2

40.9

40.9

40.7

29.4

105.7

27.7

107.5

26.9

25.8

26.9

19.7

26.1

103.8

106.0

25.8

26.0

106.0

26.9

25.9

24.9

84.1

18.0

29.1

27.6

107.6

27.7

107.6

1756-L55MXX

29.3

108.0

20.7

28.1

29.1

29.1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-12 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS DriveFaultAction

AXIS DriveFaultBits

AXIS DriveModelTimeConstant

AXIS DriveModelTimeConstant

AXIS DrivePolarity

AXIS DrivePolarity

AXIS DriveScalingBits

AXIS DriveStatusBits

AXIS DriveThermalFaultAction

AXIS DriveThermalFaultAction

AXIS DriveWarningBits

AXIS ExternalDriveType

AXIS FaultConfigurationBits

AXIS FaultConfigurationBits

AXIS FeedbackFaultAction

AXIS FeedbackFaultAction

AXIS FeedbackNoiseFaultAction

AXIS FeedbackNoiseFaultAction

AXIS FrictionCompensation

AXIS FrictionCompensation

AXIS GroupInstance

AXIS HardOvertravelFaultAction

AXIS HardOvertravelFaultAction

AXIS HomeConfigurationBits

AXIS HomeConfigurationBits

AXIS HomeDirection

AXIS HomeDirection

AXIS HomeMode

AXIS HomeMode

AXIS HomeOffset

AXIS HomeOffset

AXIS HomePosition

AXIS HomePosition

AXIS HomeReturnSpeed

AXIS HomeReturnSpeed

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

130.9

28.6

130.2

27.9

130.2

41.0

130.8

41.0

28.5

129.4

38.0

130.0

28.0

28.6

129.4

41.0

130.8

41.2

131.3

25.6

127.9

37.2

37.8

38.4

130.5

28.2

129.4

129.4

37.2

38.5

130.4

36.6

129.3

36.6

37.2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

106.3

29.6

108.2

20.6

107.6

20.2

107.6

29.5

108.2

29.5

108.2

29.6

108.2

19.7

106.3

19.8

106.3

27.3

107.0

20.7

19.9

26.4

26.9

18.1

105.4

26.9

27.4

27.7

107.5

1756-L55MXX

106.4

26.9

27.7

107.5

26.4

106.5

Estimate Execution Time B-13

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS HomeSequence

AXIS HomeSequence

AXIS HomeSpeed

AXIS HomeSpeed

AXIS IntegratorHoldEnable

AXIS IntegratorHoldEnable

AXIS InterpolatedActualPosition

AXIS InterpolatedCommandPosition

AXIS InterpolationTime

AXIS InterpolationTime

AXIS MapInstance

AXIS MarkerDistance

AXIS MasterOffset

AXIS MaximumAcceleration

AXIS MaximumAcceleration

AXIS MaximumDeceleration

AXIS MaximumDeceleration

AXIS MaximumNegativeTravel

AXIS MaximumNegativeTravel

AXIS MaximumPositiveTravel

AXIS MaximumPositiveTravel

AXIS MaximumSpeed

AXIS MaximumSpeed

AXIS MDTConfigurationList

AXIS MemoryUse

AXIS MemoryUse

AXIS ModuleChannel

AXIS ModuleClassCode

AXIS ModuleFaultBits

AXIS MotionStatusBits

AXIS MotorCapacity

AXIS MotorData

AXIS MotorElectricalAngle

AXIS MotorFeedbackConfiguration

AXIS MotorFeedbackResolution

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

22.9

22.9

28.2

41.4

39.1

40.0

37.2

563.9

131.3

38.0

129.9

38.0

129.9

41.2

131.3

48.3

37.2

35.6

36.6

40.0

130.1

40.4

39.8

59.4

41.2

131.3

40.9

29.0

130.2

41.2

131.3

28.2

129.4

39.3

40.6

20.4

29.8

28.1

29.1

108.2

32.9

17.4

17.4

26.9

355.6

26.9

25.5

26.4

108.2

29.4

108.2

27.3

107.0

27.3

107.0

29.6

29.3

28.6

40.5

29.6

28.7

29.3

29.1

107.9

1756-L55MXX

20.7

107.6

29.6

108.2

19.7

106.4

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-14 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS MotorFeedbackType

AXIS MotorID

AXIS MotorThermalFaultAction

AXIS MotorThermalFaultAction

AXIS NegativeDynamicTorqueLimit

AXIS OutputCamExecutionTargets

AXIS OutputCamLockStatus

AXIS OutputCamPendingStatus

AXIS OutputCamStatus

AXIS OutputCamTransitionStatus

AXIS OutputLimit

AXIS OutputLimit

AXIS OutputLPFilterBandwidth

AXIS OutputLPFilterBandwidth

AXIS OutputNotchFilterFrequency

AXIS OutputNotchFilterFrequency

AXIS OutputOffset

AXIS OutputOffset

AXIS placeholder

AXIS PositionCommand

AXIS PositionDataScaling

AXIS PositionDataScalingExp

AXIS PositionDataScalingFactor

AXIS PositionError

AXIS PositionErrorFaultAction

AXIS PositionErrorFaultAction

AXIS PositionErrorTolerance

AXIS PositionErrorTolerance

AXIS PositionFeedback

AXIS PositionIntegralGain

AXIS PositionIntegralGain

AXIS PositionIntegratorError

AXIS PositionLockTolerance

AXIS PositionLockTolerance

AXIS PositionPolarity

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

27.5

129.4

38.0

129.9

39.8

38.5

130.4

39.8

36.5

34.4

36.7

39.8

37.0

129.9

0.0

39.9

38.1

129.9

36.2

39.7

39.6

37.3

129.9

38.5

130.4

36.0

128.7

37.2

39.1

39.6

38.1

35.9

36.6

25.9

128.0

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

26.4

28.6

19.4

106.4

27.3

107.0

28.6

27.7

107.6

28.6

27.3

107.0

25.7

0.0

28.6

25.9

24.9

26.0

106.1

26.9

107.0

28.9

28.1

28.9

28.8

27.0

107.0

27.7

107.6

1756-L55MXX

25.6

26.4

18.3

105.3

26.9

28.6

Estimate Execution Time B-15

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS PositionProportionalGain

AXIS PositionProportionalGain

AXIS PositionServoBandwidth

AXIS PositionServoBandwidth

AXIS PositionUnwind

AXIS PositionUnwind

AXIS PositiveDynamicTorqueLimit

AXIS PowerCapacity

AXIS PowerSupplyID

AXIS PrimaryOperationMode

AXIS ProgrammedStopMode

AXIS ProgrammedStopMode

AXIS Registration1Position

AXIS Registration1Time

AXIS Registration2Position

AXIS Registration2Time

AXIS RotaryAxis

AXIS RotaryAxis

AXIS RotaryAxis

AXIS RotationalPosResolution

AXIS SercosErrorCode

AXIS ServoFaultBits

AXIS ServoLoopConfiguration

AXIS ServoLoopConfiguration

AXIS ServoOutputLevel

AXIS ServoPolarityBits

AXIS ServoPolarityBits

AXIS ServoStatusBits

AXIS SoftOvertravelFaultAction

AXIS SoftOvertravelFaultAction

AXIS StartActualPosition

AXIS StartCommandPosition

AXIS StartMasterOffset

AXIS StoppingTimeLimit

AXIS StoppingTimeLimit

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

39.1

37.8

130.5

38.4

28.9

129.4

39.6

39.1

29.2

29.2

130.1

36.5

36.3

38.4

36.7

108.8

40.6

36.0

128.7

39.6

37.3

39.3

39.7

36.2

35.1

29.9

130.5

38.5

130.5

38.5

130.5

39.4

130.6

37.2

37.2

26.4

94.1

28.3

27.3

107.6

27.8

20.1

106.3

28.8

28.6

29.3

26.0

106.1

28.7

28.9

20.8

20.8

107.5

26.4

26.0

27.8

26.8

26.9

25.6

25.2

21.1

107.7

28.9

27.8

1756-L55MXX

27.7

107.5

27.7

107.4

28.7

108.0

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-16 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS StoppingTorque

AXIS StoppingTorque

AXIS StrobeActualPosition

AXIS StrobeCommandPosition

AXIS StrobeMasterOffset

AXIS TelegramType

AXIS TestDirectionForward

AXIS TestIncrement

AXIS TestIncrement

AXIS TestStatus

AXIS TorqueCommand

AXIS TorqueDataScaling

AXIS TorqueDataScalingExp

AXIS TorqueDataScalingFactor

AXIS TorqueFeedback

AXIS TorqueLimitBipolar

AXIS TorqueLimitBipolar

AXIS TorqueLimitNegative

AXIS TorqueLimitNegative

AXIS TorqueLimitPositive

AXIS TorqueLimitPositive

AXIS TorqueLimitSource

AXIS TorqueOffset

AXIS TorqueOffset

AXIS TorquePolarity

AXIS TorqueScaling

AXIS TorqueScaling

AXIS TorqueThreshold

AXIS TorqueThreshold

AXIS TuneAcceleration

AXIS TuneAccelerationTime

AXIS TuneDeceleration

AXIS TuneDecelerationTime

AXIS TuneInertia

AXIS TuneRiseTime

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

36.2

38.5

130.4

36.0

128.7

39.1

39.1

39.1

128.7

36.0

128.8

36.0

128.7

37.2

38.0

129.9

39.1

39.1

38.4

36.2

36.7

37.2

36.0

130.4

37.6

37.2

33.9

40.6

36.0

29.0

38.5

36.0

128.7

39.6

40.7

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

27.3

107.0

25.7

27.7

107.6

25.9

106.1

28.1

28.1

28.1

28.1

28.1

27.8

26.9

26.0

106.1

26.0

106.1

26.0

106.1

26.8

26.8

24.6

25.8

26.4

20.4

27.6

107.4

27.0

1756-L55MXX

25.9

106.1

28.9

29.3

29.3

25.7

Estimate Execution Time B-17

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS TuneSpeedScaling

AXIS TuneStatus

AXIS TuningConfigurationBits

AXIS TuningConfigurationBits

AXIS TuningSpeed

AXIS TuningSpeed

AXIS TuningTorque

AXIS TuningTorque

AXIS TuningTravelLimit

AXIS TuningTravelLimit

AXIS VelocityCommand

AXIS VelocityDataScaling

AXIS VelocityDataScalingExp

AXIS VelocityDataScalingFactor

AXIS VelocityDroop

AXIS VelocityDroop

AXIS VelocityError

AXIS VelocityFeedback

AXIS VelocityFeedforwardGain

AXIS VelocityFeedforwardGain

AXIS VelocityIntegralGain

AXIS VelocityIntegralGain

AXIS VelocityIntegratorError

AXIS VelocityLimitBipolar

AXIS VelocityLimitBipolar

AXIS VelocityLimitNegative

AXIS VelocityLimitNegative

AXIS VelocityLimitPositive

AXIS VelocityLimitPositive

AXIS VelocityOffset

AXIS VelocityOffset

AXIS VelocityPolarity

AXIS VelocityProportionalGain

AXIS VelocityProportionalGain

AXIS VelocityScaling

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

128.7

36.0

128.7

36.0

128.7

38.0

129.9

36.2

39.8

39.8

38.5

130.5

38.5

130.5

39.8

36.0

33.9

130.4

37.8

38.5

130.4

39.8

35.3

35.7

36.7

36.0

128.7

38.4

36.2

38.5

130.4

38.5

130.4

38.5

130.4

28.6

26.0

106.0

25.9

106.1

26.0

106.1

27.3

107.0

25.8

27.7

107.6

27.3

26.0

106.1

28.6

28.6

27.7

107.5

27.7

107.6

28.7

25.3

25.5

26.4

27.7

107.4

27.7

107.4

1756-L55MXX

27.8

26.3

27.6

107.4

27.6

107.4

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-18 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

AXIS VelocityScaling

AXIS VelocityServoBandwidth

AXIS VelocityServoBandwidth

AXIS VelocityStandstillWindow

AXIS VelocityStandstillWindow

AXIS VelocityThreshold

AXIS VelocityThreshold

AXIS VelocityWindow

AXIS VelocityWindow

AXIS WatchPosition

SSV

GSV

CONTROLLER DataTablePadPercentage GSV

CONTROLLER KeepTestEditsOnSwitchOver GSV

CONTROLLER RedundancyEnabled

CONTROLLER TimeSlice

CONTROLLER TimeSlice

CONTROLLERDEVICE DeviceName

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

CONTROLLERDEVICE ProductCode

CONTROLLERDEVICE ProductRev

CONTROLLERDEVICE SerialNumber

CONTROLLERDEVICE Status

CONTROLLERDEVICE Type

CONTROLLERDEVICE Vendor

CST CurrentStatus

CST CurrentValue

DF1 ACKTimeout

DF1 DiagnosticCounters

DF1 DuplicateDetection

DF1 EmbeddedResponseEnable

DF1 ENQTransmitLimit

DF1 EOTSuppression

DF1 ErrorDetection

DF1 MasterMessageTransmit

DF1 MaxStationAddress

DF1 NAKReceiveLimit

DF1 NormalPollGroupSize

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

14.8

14.8

14.8

14.8

24.8

65.2

14.8

14.8

22.8

22.8

21.8

36.8

22.8

22.8

24.6

22.8

14.8

14.8

23.0

n/a

24.3

50.2

55.6

128.7

39.6

n/a n/a

130.5

38.5

130.4

36.0

128.7

36.0

128.7

36.0

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

13.5

13.5

13.5

13.5

20.1

32.2

22.0

53.7

13.5

13.5

13.5

13.5

20.5

20.7

19.2

19.2

19.2

43.0

48.6

19.2

19.2

19.8

12.8

12.9

19.8

106.1

26.0

106.1

28.9

1756-L55MXX

107.6

27.7

107.4

26.0

106.1

26.0

Estimate Execution Time B-19

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

DF1 PendingACKTimeout

DF1 PendingDuplicateDetection

DF1 PendingEmbeddedResponseEnable

DF1 PendingENQTransmitLimit

DF1 PendingEOTSuppression

DF1 PendingErrorDetection

DF1 PendingMasterMessageTransmit

DF1 PendingMaxStationAddress

DF1 PendingNAKReceiveLimit

DF1 PendingNormalPollGroupSize

DF1 PendingPollingMode

DF1 PendingReplyMessageWait

DF1 PendingSlavePollTimeout

DF1 PendingStationAddress

DF1 PendingTokenHoldFactor

DF1 PendingTransmitRetries

DF1 PollingMode

DF1 ReplyMessageWait

DF1 SlavePollTimeout

DF1 StationAddress

DF1 TokenHoldFactor

DF1 TransmitRetries

FAULTLOG MajorEvents

FAULTLOG MajorEvents

FAULTLOG MajorFaultBits

FAULTLOG MajorFaultBits

FAULTLOG MinorEvents

FAULTLOG MinorEvents

FAULTLOG MinorFaultBits

FAULTLOG MinorFaultBits

MESSAGE ConnectionPath

MESSAGE ConnectionPath

MESSAGE ConnectionRate

MESSAGE ConnectionRate

MESSAGE MessageType

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

25.8

15.9

54.4

19.2

25.8

15.9

24.1

15.2

14.8

14.8

24.1

15.2

14.8

24.8

24.8

23.0

25.7

14.6

15.7

21.2

21.8

21.6

22.4

22.4

22.1

104.9

21.2

21.2

21.9

21.7

21.6

22.4

19.8

21.7

21.2

19.7

21.2

21.2

21.6

19.7

21.2

21.2

21.6

41.2

24.8

21.0

20.7

12.5

22.0

20.5

13.5

13.5

91.4

91.2

13.5

22.0

91.6

92.2

92.1

92.0

91.6

91.6

91.2

91.8

1756-L55MXX

92.1

90.1

91.6

91.2

91.2

91.7

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-20 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

MESSAGE MessageType

MESSAGE Port

MESSAGE Port

MESSAGE TimeoutMultiplier

MESSAGE TimeoutMultiplier

MESSAGE UnconnectedTimeout

MESSAGE UnconnectedTimeout

MODULE EntryStatus

MODULE FaultCode

MODULE FaultInfo

MODULE ForceStatus

MODULE Instance

MODULE LEDStatus

MODULE Mode

MODULE Mode

MOTIONGROUP AutoTagUpdate

MOTIONGROUP AutoTagUpdate

MOTIONGROUP Instance

MOTIONGROUP MaximumInterval

MOTIONGROUP MaximumInterval

MOTIONGROUP MinimumInterval

MOTIONGROUP StartTime

MOTIONGROUP TaskLastScanTime

MOTIONGROUP TaskMaximumScanTime

MOTIONGROUP TaskMaximumScanTime

MOTIONGROUP Watchdog

MOTIONGROUP Watchdog

PROGRAM DisableFlag

PROGRAM DisableFlag

PROGRAM Instance

PROGRAM LastScanTime

PROGRAM LastScanTime

PROGRAM MajorFaultRecord

PROGRAM MajorFaultRecord

PROGRAM MaxScanTime

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

34.5

18.8

25.9

16.2

17.3

28.0

17.3

16.4

34.2

34.2

28.0

28.0

16.0

27.2

34.2

27.2

70.8

47.3

25.9

17.2

24.7

14.2

17.5

23.8

25.5

17.7

18.4

13.3

25.7

14.6

23.8

66.2

15.7

27.7

15.7

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

22.7

13.5

35.5

15.6

22.5

22.5

22.6

22.5

21.7

21.9

60.1

47.6

21.7

27.7

30.9

27.7

27.7

20.4

13.7

21.6

19.8

14.8

15.5

14.4

20.7

20.7

20.0

20.1

21.5

1756-L55MXX

57.6

12.5

30.0

12.5

19.7

20.9

Estimate Execution Time B-21

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

PROGRAM MaxScanTime

PROGRAM MinorFaultRecord

PROGRAM MinorFaultRecord

PROGRAM SFCRestart

PROGRAM SFCRestart

REDUNDANCY MaxDataTransferSize

ROUTINE Instance

SERIALPORT BaudRate

SERIALPORT DataBits

SERIALPORT Parity

SERIALPORT PendingBaudRate

SERIALPORT PendingDataBits

SERIALPORT PendingParity

SERIALPORT PendingRTSOffDelay

SERIALPORT PendingRTSSendDelay

SERIALPORT PendingStopBits

SERIALPORT RTSOffDelay

SERIALPORT RTSSendDelay

SERIALPORT StopBits

TASK Instance

TASK LastScanTime

TASK LastScanTime

TASK MaxInterval

TASK MaxInterval

TASK MaxScanTime

TASK MaxScanTime

TASK MinInterval

TASK MinInterval

TASK Priority

TASK Rate

TASK StartTime

TASK StartTime

TASK Watchdog

TASK Watchdog

WALLCLOCKTIME CSTOffset

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

SSV

SSV

GSV

GSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

24.3

26.1

31.9

22.3

26.0

15.9

32.0

22.3

26.0

15.9

32.0

22.3

23.2

23.2

15.0

19.0

26.0

30.7

31.1

15.0

15.0

103.6

103.6

20.3

20.5

20.8

103.6

30.5

n/a

17.8

24.9

16.2

70.8

47.3

17.0

26.4

27.1

19.9

21.4

26.4

27.1

21.4

21.7

26.4

27.1

21.4

32.2

24.7

11.9

15.4

21.4

21.7

90.5

90.0

18.9

18.9

90.0

90.0

90.0

90.2

15.7

20.3

11.9

11.9

1756-L55MXX

21.9

60.1

47.6

14.1

32.1

21.6

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-22 Estimate Execution Time

Table B.3 Execution Times for the GSV and SSVInstructions (Continued)

Object/Attribute: Instruction: True Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1MX

WALLCLOCKTIME CSTOffset

WALLCLOCKTIME CurrentValue

WALLCLOCKTIME CurrentValue

WALLCLOCKTIME DateTime

WALLCLOCKTIME DateTime

SSV

GSV

SSV

GSV

SSV

1764.2

42.9

67.4

72.2

117.6

Table B.4 Array Index Times

For a tag in the subscript of a: one dimension array two dimension array three dimension array

1756-L55MXX

1257.4

33.3

59.2

57.0

100.7

Add (

µ s):

1.5

22

27

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Estimate Execution Time B-23

Estimate Execution Time of a Function Block Routine

2.

1.

42609

3.

1. For each function block instruction, add the time from Table B.5 on page B-24.

2. For each IREF and OREF, add the following time. (Skip any immediate values.)

For an:

IREF

OREF

With a data type of:

BOOL

DINT

REAL

BOOL

DINT

REAL

1.00

0.16

0.16

0.16

Add (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx

0.56

0.62

1756-L55Mx

0.55

0.60

0.96

0.16

0.16

0.15

3. For each wire, add the following time:

If the wire connects a:

BOOL-to-BOOL

DINT-to-DINT

DINT-to-REAL

REAL-to-DINT

REAL-to-REAL

Add (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx

0.40

0.46

8.98

13.26

0.83

1756-L55Mx

0.39

0.45

7.32

10.59

0.81

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-24 Estimate Execution Time

EXAMPLE

Estimate the execution time of a function block routine for a

1756-L1 controller

0.62

µ s for DINT IREF

8.98

µ s for

DINT-to-REAL wire

12

µ s for ADD block

ADD

DINT

20

µ s for DIV block

DIV

REAL

1

µ s for REAL IREF

0.83

µ s for REAL-to-REAL wire

0.83

µ s for

REAL-to-REAL wire

42609

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

For each function block instruction, add the following time:

Table B.5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions

Instruction: Time (

µ s):

1756-L1, -L1Mx

BOR

BTDT

BXOR

COS

CTUD

ABS

ACS

ADD

ALM

AND

ASN

ATN

BAND

BNOT

10

14

9

224

29

2

273

12

105

1

264

226

9

10

9

12

8

209

14

72

1

243

214

8

8

1756-L55Mx

2

251

11

Notes:

Estimate Execution Time B-25

Table B.5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Time (

µ s): Notes:

D2SD

1756-L1, -L1Mx

78

1756-L55Mx

60

HLL

HPF

INTG

JKFF

LDL2

LDLG

LEQ

LES

LIM

LN

LOG

LPF

MAVE (uniform)

D3SD

DEDT

DEG

DERV

DFF

DIV

12

20

EQU 2

ESEL-Average Sel.

85

96

113

20

104

ESEL-High Select

ESEL-Low Select

71

80

ESEL-Manual 34

ESEL-Median Sel.

138

FGEN

FRD

GEQ

GRT

2

2

142

10

2

2

283

222

24

302

104

14

5

194

194

298

61 + (x * 16.3)

MAVE (weighted) 46 + (x * 11.5)

2

2

193

141

19

196

72

11

4

182

183

193

49 + (x * 9.7)

2

2

97

8

53

60

29

103

10

19

2

62

73

80

19

68

38 + (x * 7.1) x = number of samples x = number of samples

MAXC

MEQ

23

2

22

2

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-26 Estimate Execution Time

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

SIN

SNEG

SOC

SQR

SRTP

SSUM

RESD

RLIM

RMPS

RTOR

SCL

SCRV

SEL

SETD

OR

OSFI

OSRI

PI

PIDE

PMUL

POSP

RAD

MUL

MUX

MVMT

NEG

NEQ

NOT

NTCH

Table B.5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Time (

µ s): Notes:

MINC

1756-L1, -L1Mx

24

1756-L55Mx

23

MOD

MSTD

65

136 + (x * 49.0)

58

91 + (x * 28.8) x = number of samples

63

268

15

10

10

96

163

57

230

16

239

39

155

32 + (x * 28.9)

589

135

136

19

1

13

12

190

19

24

13

2

2

1

357

41

178

13

10

11

72

111

37

215

14

168

29

100

25 + (x * 17.2)

410

86

88

18

1

9

9

133

18

21

11

2

2

1

236 x = number of samples

SUB 12 11

Estimate Execution Time B-27

Table B.5 Execution Times for Function Block Instructions (Continued)

Instruction: Time (

µ s): Notes:

TAN

1756-L1, -L1Mx

291

1756-L55Mx

273

TOD

TOFR

TONR

TOT

TRN

UPDN

XOR

XPY

14

27

2

401

16

48

52

118

11

20

1

374

12

35

35

83

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

B-28 Estimate Execution Time

Estimate Execution Time of a Motion Action

Use the following table to determine the time required for the controller to execute various motion actions.

Table B.6 Execution Times for Motion Actions

Motion state or action

(

∆

= per axis) motion task overhead servo axis

∆ virtual axis

∆ consumed axis

∆

Logix5550 average execution time (

233

179

172

896

(1) auto tag update

AXIS_SERVO data type

AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE data type

AXIS_VIRTUAL data type

197 servo on

∆ trap move

∆

S-curve move

∆

AXIS_CONSUMED data type trap jog

∆

S-curve jog

∆

gearing

gearing actual

∆ clutch

∆ command

∆ clutch

∆ position camming (actual, linear)

∆

108

33

230

358

220

328

266

166

83

138

441 position camming (actual, cubic)

∆

531 position camming (command, linear)

∆

232 position camming (command, cubic)

∆

356 time camming (linear)

∆ time camming (cubic)

∆

180

287

µ s)

Logix5555 average execution time (

131

115

105

573

114

79

19

135

213

124

197

158

72

65

76

239

302

144

210

117

167

(1)

µ s)

(1)

This value is worst case (producer/consumer update ratio = 2/3). To reduce the time by 25%, use a consumer coarse update period that is an integer multiple of the producer coarse update period (e.g., 2/4).

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Appendix

C

Estimate Memory Use

Using This Appendix Use this appendix to calculate the memory used for data conversions, instructions, and array indexes. Values are for ControlLogix controllers

(Cat. No. 1756-L1, -L1Mx, -L55Mxx) and RSLogix 5000

software.

TIP

When you download your project, the controller optimizes memory use, which could reduce your calculated memory use by as much as 10% from the values presented in this appendix.

To calculate the memory for:

Data Conversions

Ladder Instructions

Function Block Instructions

Array Indexes

See page:

C-1

C-3

C-7

C-9

1 Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C-2 Estimate Memory Use

Data Conversions If you use a data type that is not an optimal data type or if you mix data types, you must add memory for data conversion.

Sign-Extension Memory Requirements

Use the following table to determine the memory required to convert data by sign-extension.

Table C.1 Memory Size of a Conversion by Sign-Extension

To convert a:

Source operand

Destination operand

From a:

SINT

INT

DINT

DINT

REAL

To a:

DINT

REAL

DINT

REAL

REAL

SINT

INT

REAL

SINT

INT

DINT

52

76

72

72

72

Add (bytes):

48

120

60

132

76

52

Zero-Fill Memory Requirements

Use the following table to determine the memory required to convert data by zero-fill.

Table C.2 Memory Size of a Conversion by Zero-Fill

To convert a:

Source operand

From a:

SINT

INT

Destination operand DINT

To a:

DINT

DINT

SINT

INT

Add (bytes):

0

8

88

100

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Ladder Instructions

Estimate Memory Use C-3

Examples:

Instruction:

ADD

Source A

Source B

Destination

MUL

Source A

Source B

Destination

REAL

REAL

DINT

DINT

Data Type:

REAL

DINT

REAL

REAL

Memory (bytes):

44 bytes for the ADD instruction

76 bytes for DINT to REAL conversion by sign-extension

120 bytes total

44 bytes for MUL instruction

76 bytes for DINT to REAL conversion by sign-extension

76 bytes for REAL to DINT conversion by sign-extension

192 bytes total

The following table shows the memory use of the ladder instructions.

For those instructions that use an expression (CMP, CPT, FAL, FSC), add memory for each operation within the expression. For each operation, use the value for the corresponding instruction.

Example:

Instruction:

CMP ( tag_a * tag_b / 100)

* (MUL)

/ (DIV)

Data Type:

REAL

REAL

Memory:

76 bytes overhead

44 bytes for the MUL operation

44 bytes for the DIV operation

164 bytes total

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C-4 Estimate Memory Use

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table C.3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions (Continued)

CPT

CTD

CTU

DDT

CONCAT

COP

COS

CPS

BSR

BTD

CLR

CMP

AWA

AWT

BRK

BSL

DEG

DELETE

DIV

DTOS

DTR

EQU

FAL

ARL

ASN

ATN

AVE

AFI

AHL

AND

ARD

Instruction:

ACL

ACS

ACS

ADD

ADD

76

8

8

72

116

64

140

64

52

52

20

76

80

80

44

52

40

20

92

144

108

44

72

76

140

140

164

4

68

28

76

Memory for DINT (bytes): Memory for REAL (bytes):

64

140

140

28

28

48

48

44

44

48

48

116

20

76

64

48

64

96

52

44

20

116

Estimate Memory Use C-5

Table C.3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions (Continued)

LOG

LOWER

MAAT

MAFR

MAG

MAH

MAHD

MAJ

LFL

LFU

LIM

LN

JSR

LBL

LEQ

LES

MAM

MAOC

MAPC

MAR

MAS

MASD

MASR

FOR

FRD

FSC

GEQ

GRT

GSV

INSERT

JMP

Instruction:

FBC

FFL

FFU

FIND

FLL

216

56

72

256

140

88

56

56

64

64

52

140

56

12

20

20

308

480

168

192

136

56

56

20

84

124

24

64

40

148

20

64

64

108

60

Memory for DINT (bytes): Memory for REAL (bytes):

72

64

64

60

152

36

36

84

36

36

64

64

44

48

48

172

116

124

96

84

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C-6 Estimate Memory Use

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Table C.3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions (Continued)

MRP

MSF

MSG

MSO

MUL

MVM

NEG

NEQ

MGSD

MGSP

MGSR

MID

MOD

MOV

MRAT

MRHD

NOP

NOT

ONS

OR

OSF

OSR

OTE

MDF

MDO

MDOC

MDR

MDW

MEQ

MGPS

MGS

Instruction:

MATC

MAW

MCCP

MCD

MCR

44

44

28

20

124

56

36

56

44

24

56

64

52

52

52

108

44

44

4

4

28

36

28

56

32

60

60

56

124

120

64

Memory for DINT (bytes): Memory for REAL (bytes):

124

72 124

180

236

4

96

72

44

48

72

44

56

20

Estimate Memory Use C-7

Table C.3 Memory Size of Ladder Instructions (Continued)

TOD

TOF

TON

TRN

SUB

SWPB

TAN

TND

SQL

SQO

SQR

SRT

SSV

STD

STOD

STOR

UID

UIE

UPPER

XIC

XIO

XOR

XPY

Instruction:

OTL

OTU

PID

RAD

RES

RET

RTO

RTOS

SBR

SIN

SIZE

SOR - EOR (empty rung)

SQI

40

8

8

40

28

72

140

12

84

104

72

72

48

44

40

108

36

36

88

4

4

28

144

140

124

16

48

40

8

72

40

Memory for DINT (bytes): Memory for REAL (bytes):

4

4

228

144

8

92

52

48

40

108

84

44

48

92

52

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C-8 Estimate Memory Use

Function Block Instructions The following table shows the memory use of the function block instructions.

Table C.4 Memory Size of Function Block Instructions

MAXC

MINC

MSTD

MUX

NTCH

OSFI

OSRI

PI

HLL

HPF

INTG

JKFF

LDL2

LDLG

LPF

MAVE

PIDE

PMUL

POSP

RESD

CTUD

D2SD

D3SD

DEDT

DERV

DFF

ESEL

FGEN

Instruction: blank sheet

ALM

BAND

BNOT

BOR

BXOR

172

184

184

168

188

188

216

208

348

188

208

184

172

172

172

216

196

172

172

188

184

188

248

204

204

300

344

296

Memory (bytes):

84

204

188

176

188

180

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Array Indexes

Estimate Memory Use C-9

Table C.4 Memory Size of Function Block Instructions (Continued)

SEL

SETD

SNEG

SOC

SRTP

SSUM

TOFR

TONR

TOT

UPDN

Instruction:

RLIM

RMPS

RTOR

SCL

SCRV

Memory (bytes):

184

324

196

168

172

192

184

188

168

168

204

196

200

264

176

Memory use for an instruction increases for each parameter that references an array. Keep in mind these considerations:

1. When an array uses immediate values for the index, there is no additional memory added.

Example:

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

Tag:

DINT

DINT

DINT

DINT[0]

DINT[0,1,2]

DINT[3,4,5]

Memory:

24 bytes

24 bytes

24 bytes

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C-10 Estimate Memory Use

2. When an array uses a tag (type DINT) as an index, additional memory is used, depending on the number of dimensions in the array.

Tag:

DINT[DINT]

DINT[DINT,0]

DINT[0,DINT,0]

Additional Memory:

84 bytes

152 bytes

152 bytes

For example:

Example:

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

Tag:

DINT

DINT[DINT]

DINT

DINT[DINT,0,0]

Memory:

108 bytes

176 bytes

3. The controller uses a 32-bit index for all arrays. If you use a tag other than DINT to reference a position in an array, you add the

data conversion memory use (see page C-1) as well as the

memory use for using a tag as an index.

Example:

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

Tag:

DINT

DINT[INT]

DINT

DINT[INT,0,0]

Memory:

168 bytes

236 bytes

4. Changing the source and destination data type in the above examples, increases the instruction’s memory use.

Example:

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

Tag:

DINT

INT[INT]

Memory:

200 bytes

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Estimate Memory Use C-11

Example:

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

Tag:

SINT

INT[INT]

DINT

SINT[INT,0,0}

INT

SINT[INT,0,0]

Memory:

240 bytes

268 bytes

320 bytes

5. If you use an expression in the index, additional memory is used, depending on the operators.

Example:

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

Tag:

DINT

DINT[DINT + DINT]

Memory:

132 bytes

6. If you use multiple arrays in one instructions, add the appropriate memory use for each array reference.

Example:

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

MOV instruction

Source

Destination

Tag: Memory:

184 bytes

DINT[DINT]

DINT[DINT]

DINT[DINT, DINT, DINT]

DINT[DINT, DINT, DINT}

320 bytes

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

C-12 Estimate Memory Use

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Determine When Data Is Updated

Appendix

D

ControlLogix controllers update date asynchronous with the execution of logic. Use the following flowchart to determine when a producer

(controller, input module, or bridge module) will send data.

input or output data?

input output analog or digital?

analog

RTS

RPI?

Yes

Data is sent to the backplane at the RTS.

No digital

COS for any point on the module?

Data is sent to the backplane at the RTS and RPI.

Yes

No analog or digital?

analog digital remote or local?

remote local

Data is sent to the backplane at the RPI and at the change of a specified point.

• Over a ControlNet network, remote data is sent at the actual packet interval.

• Over an EtherNet/IP network, remote data is sent close to the RPI, on average.

Data is sent to the backplane at the

RPI

Data is sent to the backplane at the RPI and at the end of every task.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

D-2 Determine When Data Is Updated

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

1

Appendix

E

Reconfigure an I/O module

Use the Module Reconfigure message to send new configuration information to an I/O module. During the reconfiguration:

Input modules continue to send input data to the controller.

Output modules continue to controller their output devices.

A Module Reconfigure message requires the following configuration properties:

In this property:

Message Type

Select:

Module Reconfigure

To reconfigure an I/O module:

1. Set the required member of the configuration tag of the module to the new value.

2. Send a Module Reconfigure message to the module.

EXAMPLE

Reconfigure an I/O module

When reconfigure[5] is on, the MOV instruction sets the high alarm to 60 for the local module in slot 4. The Module

Reconfigure message then sends the new alarm value to the module. The ONS instruction prevents the rung from sending multiple messages to the module while the reconfigure[5] is on.

43006

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

E-2 Reconfigure an I/O module

Notes:

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

Index

Numerics

1747 I/O

20-1

1756 I/O

3-1, 8-1

1756-CNB module

8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 11-1, 13-1

1756-DHRIO module

17-1, 18-1, 20-1

1756-ENBx module

1-1, 3-1, 5-1, 7-1

1756-ENET module

1-1, 3-1, 5-1, 7-1

1756-M02AE module

24-1

1756-NET-AIC

19-3

1771 I/O

ControlNet network

9-1

remote I/O network

20-1

1788-CNC module

11-1

1791 I/O

20-1

1794 I/O

ControlNet network

10-1

EtherNet/IP network

4-1

remote I/O network

20-1

1794-AENx module

1-1, 4-1

A

address map

A-1

AIC+

19-3

array indexes

C-9

asynchronous execution

D-1

ControlNet network

11-1

DH+ network

17-1

DH-485 network

19-1

Ethernet network

5-1

configure

1756-ENBx or -ENET module 1-1

1794-AENx module 1-1 connection monitor

15-1

troubleshoot

3-1, 4-1, 6-1, 8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 13-1

ControlNet network communicate with a PanelView terminal

13-1

communicate with an RSView32 project

14-1

determine when data is updated

D-1

send a message over a

11-1

D

DeviceNet network

16-1

DF1 dial-up

23-1

master and slave communications

22-1

workstation

21-1

DH+ network

17-1, 18-1

DH-485

19-1

dial-up communications

23-1

domain name assign 1-1

B

battery

25-1

block transfers

ControlNet network

9-1

remote I/O network

20-1

C

Communicate Over a Remote I/O Network

20-1

Communicate with 1756 I/O

3-1, 8-1

Communicate with 1771 I/O Over a ControlNet Network

9-1

Communicate with 1794 I/O Over a ControlNet Network

10-1

Communicate with a DeviceNet Device

16-1

Communicate with a PanelView Terminal Over a

ControlNet Network

13-1

Communicate with an RSView32 Project

ControlNet network

14-1

Ethernet network

7-1

Communicate with Another Controller

E

Establish Serial Communications with the Controller

21-1

Estimate

Execution Time

B-1

estimating memory use

C-1

Ethernet driver

2-1

Ethernet network assign IP address 1-1 communicate with a PanelView terminal

6-1

communicate with an RSView32 project

7-1

configure a 1756-ENBx or -ENET module

1-1, 3-1, 5-1,

7-1

configure a 1794-AENx module 1-1 configure an Ethernet driver

2-1

determine when data is updated

D-1

program over an

2-1

send a message

5-1

execution time

B-1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

2 Index

F

fault, module

15-1

FlexLogix controller

ControlNet network

11-1

DF1 network

22-1

DH-485 network

19-1

I

I/O

1747

20-1

1756

3-1, 8-1

1771

9-1, 20-1

1791

20-1

1794

4-1, 10-1, 20-1

determine when data is updated

D-1

DeviceNet

16-1

fault

15-1

instruction execution time

B-1

memory use

C-1

IP address assign 1-1

L

LED

RS232

19-10

M

Maintain the Battery

25-1

Map a PLC/SLC Address

A-1

memory array indexes

C-9

controller usage

C-1

sign extension

C-1

zero fill

C-2

messages

ControlNet network

11-1

DH+

17-1, 18-1

DH-485

19-1

dial-up

23-1

Ethernet network

5-1

map address

A-1

master and slave controllers

22-1

MicroLogix controller

DH-485 network

19-1

modem

22-1, 23-1

Monitor Connections

15-1

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001 motion control, program

24-1

P

PanelView Terminal

ControlNet network

13-1

EtherNet/IP network

6-1

PLC-5 controllers

ControlNet network

11-1, 12-1

DF1

22-1

DH+

17-1, 18-1

Ethernet network

5-1

map address

A-1

program over a serial cable

21-1

over an Ethernet network

2-1

Program a Controller over an Ethernet Network

2-1

Program Motion Control

24-1

R

remote I/O

1756

3-1, 8-1

1771

9-1, 20-1

1794

4-1, 10-1, 20-1

route messages

ControlNet networks

12-1

DH+ network

18-1

routing table

17-1, 18-1

RS232

LED

19-10

RSView32 project

ControlNet network

14-1

Ethernet network

7-1

S

serial cable

19-3, 21-1, 22-1

serial communications dial-up

23-1

master and slave controllers

22-1

workstation

21-1

sign extension

C-1

SLC 500 controller

DF1

22-1

DH+

17-1, 18-1

DH-485 network

19-1

Ethernet network

5-1

map address

A-1

T

time, execution

B-1

U

Universal Remote I/O network

20-1

Z

zero fill

C-2

Index 3

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

4 Index

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001

How Are We Doing?

Your comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the future.

Thank you for taking the time to provide us feedback.

You can complete this form and mail it back to us, visit us online at www.ab.com/manuals, or email us at [email protected]

Pub. Title/Type ControlLogix™ System

Cat. No.

1756-L1, -L1Mx,

-L55Mxx, -L63

Pub. No.

1756-UM001D-EN-P Pub. Date November 2001 Part No.

957626-25

Please complete the sections below. Where applicable, rank the feature (1=needs improvement, 2=satisfactory, and 3=outstanding).

Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you?

Completeness

(all necessary information is provided)

1 2 3 Can we add more information to help you?

procedure/step illustration example explanation guideline definition feature other

Technical Accuracy

(all provided information is correct)

1 2 3 Can we be more accurate?

text illustration

Clarity

(all provided information is easy to understand)

1 2 3 How can we make things clearer?

Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form.

Your Name

Your Title/Function

Location/Phone

Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments?

___No, there is no need to contact me

___Yes, please call me

___Yes, please email me at __________________________

___Yes, please contact me via ________________________

Return this form to: Allen-Bradley Marketing Communications, 1 Allen-Bradley Dr., Mayfield Hts., OH 44124-9705

Phone: 440-646-3176 Fax: 440-646-3525 Email: [email protected]

Publication ICCG-5.21- January 2001 PN 955107-82

Other Comments

PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)

PLEASE FOLD HERE

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 18235 CLEVELAND OH

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE

1 ALLEN-BRADLEY DR

MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124-9705

NO POSTAGE

NECESSARY

IF MAILED

IN THE

UNITED STATES

Rockwell Automation

Support

For technical assistance, call your local Rockwell Automation representative or contact Rockwell Automation in one of the following ways:

Phone

Internet

United

States/Canada

Outside United

States/Canada

1.440.646.5800

You can access the phone number for your country via the Internet:

1. Go to http://www.ab.com

2. Click on Product Support

(http://support.automation.rockwell.com)

3. Under Support Centers , click on Contact

Information

1. Go to http://www.ab.com

2. Click on Product Support

(http://support.automation.rockwell.com)

Your Questions or Comments on this Manual

If you find a problem with this manual, please notify us of it on the enclosed How Are We Doing form.

Back Cover

Allen-Bradley, ControlLogix, DH+, FlexLogix, PanelView, PLC-5, RSLinx, RSLogix, RSNetWorx, RSView32, and SLC are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.

ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.

Ethernet is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation.

Publication 1756-UM001D-EN-P - November 2001 2

Supersedes Publication 1756-UM001C-EN-P - June 2001

PN 957626-25

Copyright © 2001 Rockwell Automation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents